Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AWord to Mazda Owners
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. In the event of a crash, this device records data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer
vehicles.
Air Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to
damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ...] may
contain Perchlorate Material– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2008 Mazda Motor Corporation
Printed in Japan Nov. 2008(Print1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Use This Manual
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and sometimes
suggests how to make better use of your
vehicle.
The symbol below, located on some parts
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
Illustrations complement the words of the
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can
find out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
The symbol below in this manual means
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this
happen”.
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
You'll find several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if
the caution is ignored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint
systems and SRS air bags.
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment
of various parts.
Important information about driving your Mazda.
Explanation of instruments and controls.
Interior Comfort
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
In Case of an Emergency
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
11
Technical information about your Mazda.
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Interior Equipment (View A) .................................................... 1-2
Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-5
Front .......................................................................................... 1-5
Rear ........................................................................................... 1-6
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View A)
Hood release handle .......................................................................................... page 3-42
Trunk release button .......................................................................................... page 3-33
Outside mirror switch ........................................................................................ page 3-73
1-2
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View B)
AT shift lever (Sport AT) ................................................................................... page 5-13
Accessory socket ............................................................................................... page 6-83
Bottle holder ...................................................................................................... page 6-81
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-3
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View C)
Sunvisor ............................................................................................................. page 6-80
Vanity mirror ...................................................................................................... page 6-80
Cup holder ......................................................................................................... page 6-81
1-4
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
Front
Convertible top (Soft top) .................................................................................. page 3-43
Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-40
Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-34
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-5
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
Rear
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-73
Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-30
Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-34
1-6
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
2
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint
systems and SRS air bags.
Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2
Seats .......................................................................................... 2-2
Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ................ 2-12
Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-17
Limitations to SRS Air Bag .................................................... 2-37
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch .................................. 2-39
Driver and Passenger Occupant Classification System ........... 2-43
Monitoring and Maintenance .................................................. 2-48
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
qSeat Slide
Seats
WARNING
Adjust the driver's seat only when the
vehicle is stopped:
WARNING
Do not modify or replace the front
seats:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous. The
driver could lose control of the vehicle
and have an accident.
Modifying or replacing the front seats
such as replacing the upholstery or
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The
front seats contain air bag
components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such
modifications could damage the
supplemental restraint system and
result in serious injury. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is
any need to remove or reinstall the
front seats.
To move a seat forward or backward, raise
the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position and release the lever.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is
dangerous. A collision, even one not
strong enough to inflate the air bags,
could damage the front seats which
contain essential air bag
components. If there was a
subsequent collision, an air bag may
not deploy which could lead to
injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,
front seat belt pretensioners and air
bags after a collision.
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and
backward.
Make sure the adjustable components
of a seat are locked in place:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that
are not securely locked are
dangerous. In a sudden stop or
collision, the seat or seatback could
move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat
are locked in place by attempting to
slide the seat forward and backward
and rocking the seatback.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Do not drive with the seatback
unlocked:
All of the seatbacks play an
qSeat Recline
WARNING
Do not drive with either front seat
reclined:
important role in your protection in a
vehicle. Leaving the seatback
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow
passengers to be ejected or thrown
around and baggage to strike
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you do not get the full
protection from seat belts. During
sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and
suffer serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.
occupants in a sudden stop or
collision, resulting in severe injury.
After adjusting the seatback at any
time, even when there are no other
passengers, rock the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
To change the seatback angle, lean
forward slightly while raising the lever.
Then lean back to the desired position and
release the lever.
Always sit in the passenger seat
properly with the seatback upright and
feet on the floor:
Your passenger seat has weight
sensors, sitting in the passenger seat
improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous as it
can take off weight from the seat
bottom and affect the weight
determination of the passenger
sensing system. As a result the
passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which
could result in serious injury. Always
sit upright against the seatback with
your feet on the floor.
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seatback is locked in
place by attempting to push it forward and
backward.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Warmerí
CAUTION
When returning a rear-reclined
seatback to its upright position,
make sure you hold onto the
seatback with your other hand while
operating the lever. If the seatback is
not supported, it will flip forward
suddenly and could cause injury.
The driver and passenger seats can be
warmed by rotating the applicable seat
warmer dial while the ignition is switched
ON.
The seat temperature increases as the
number on the dial increases. When the
seat warmers are not in use, rotate the seat
warmer dials to 0.
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)í
By moving the seat lever up or down, the
driver's seat height can be adjusted.
Up
Down
2-4
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
WARNING
Use the seat warmer when the engine is
running, and do not continue to use it for a
long period of time.
Ø Be careful when using the seat
warmer. The heat from the seat
warmer may be too hot for some
people, as indicated below, and
could cause a low-temperature
burn.
Ø
Infants, small babies, elderly
people, and physically
challenged people
People with delicate skin
People who are excessively
fatigued
People who are drunk
People who have taken sleep-
inducing medicine such as
sleeping pills or cold medicine
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø Do not use the seat warmer with
anything having high moisture-
retention ability such as a blanket
or cushion on the seat. The seat
may be heated excessively and
cause a low-temperature burn.
Ø Do not use the seat warmer even
when taking a short nap in the
vehicle. The seat may be heated
excessively and cause a low-
temperature burn.
Ø Do not place heavy objects with
sharp projections on the seat, or
insert needles or pins into it. This
could cause the seat to become
excessively heated and result in
injury from a minor burn.
CAUTION
Do not use organic solvents to clean
the seat. It may damage the seat
surface and the heater.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and passenger always wear seat belts.
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way
when not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, the passenger's seat lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two modes: emergency
locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode.
restraint system in the passenger seat but there is no child-restraint tether available. As
there is no rear seat on this vehicle, the preferred location for children, following the
manufacturer's instructions on the LATCH child restraint-system and this owner's manual is
important (page 2-25).
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,
which could cause serious injury or death.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt
webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate
protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt
systems in use during an accident before they are used again.
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has
been expended:
If the air bags deploy the corresponding pretensioner(s) may also deploy at the same
time. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners will only function once. While it is
safer to use a crash-used seat belt that was used in an accident than no seat belt at
all, using a seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter loaded reduces
the safety available to you. If the seat belt pretensioners are not replaced, the risk of
injury in a collision will increase. Expended seat belt pretensioners and air bags must
be replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy. Additionally, the load
limiter will only limit loads on the chest once in a collision and this is another reason
to have the seat belts inspected. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect
the seat belt pretensioners and air bags after any collision.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and seat belt guides are soiled, so try
to keep them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to “Cleaning
the Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing” (page 8-55).
Seat belt guide
qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.
qEmergency Locking Mode
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, it will
always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by
pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable
movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking
mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return the belt to the more
comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level
area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it
around you again.
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it
out slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again
slowly.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qAutomatic Locking Mode
To enable seat belt automatic locking mode, pull it all the way out and connect it as
and stay locked on it. If the LATCH lower anchors are not used alone for LATCH style
junior seats and infant carriers without tethers, always use the automatic locking mode to
keep the child-restraint system from shifting to an unsafe position in the event of an
accident. See the section on child restraint (page 2-17).
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
3. Insert the seat belt tongue into the seat
belt buckle until you hear a click
sound.
Seat Belt
WARNING
Always wear the seat belt with it
correctly routed in its guide:
Seat belt tongue
Wearing a seat belt without the seat
belt routed in its guide is dangerous
because the seat belt would not be
able to provide adequate protection
in an accident, which could result in
serious injury.
Seat belt guide
Seat belt buckle
WARNING
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the
Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
Always make sure the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is positioned
across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on
your neck, or on your upper arm.
qFastening the Seat Belt
1. Grasp the seat belt tongue.
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly
against your body.
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.
Lap/shoulder belt
Seat belt tongue
Keep low on
hip bone
Take up slack
Too high
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qSeat Belt Caution Label
WARNING
A caution label has been placed inside the
sleeve of the lap portion of the driver's
seat belt. When an accident occurs while
the seat belt is in use, the resulting stress
on the seat belt will cause an indicator
with the words “REPLACE BELT”
visible on it to be pulled out of the sleeve
below the caution label. This indicates
that THE SEAT BELT MUST BE
REPLACED.
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat
Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn
too high is dangerous. In a collision,
this would concentrate the impact
force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap
portion of the belt snugly and as low
as possible.
Also note that if at any time the seat belt
has undergone stress because of an
accident or other reason, damage to the
seat belt's webbing, metal fittings, or
anchor bolt may have occurred, even
though nothing appears to be wrong with
the seat belt. For this reason we
qUnfastening the Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out
and check for kinks or twists. Then make
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
recommend that the seat belt be replaced
after it has undergone stress, whether or
not the indicator has been pulled out.
Caution
label
Button
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Pretensioner and
Load Limiting Systems
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended
in this owner's manual:
For optimum protection, the driver and
passenger seat belts are equipped with
pretensioner and load limiting systems.
For both these systems to work properly
you must wear the seat belt properly.
Incorrect positioning of the driver and
passenger seat belts is dangerous.
Without proper positioning, the
pretensioner and load limiting
systems cannot provide adequate
could result in serious injury. For
more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to “Fastening the seat
belts” (page 2-10).
Pretensioners:
In moderate or severe frontal or near-
frontal accidents, the air bag and
pretensioner systems deploy
simultaneously. The seat belt retractors
remove slack quickly as the air bags are
expanding.
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
the passenger, like the passenger air bag,
is designed to only deploy in accordance
with the total seated weight on the
passenger seat (page 2-43) or when the
passenger air bag deactivation switch
turned to the ON position (page 2-39).
Any time the air bags and seat belt
pretensioners have fired they must be
replaced.
If the air bags deploy the
corresponding pretensioner(s) may
also deploy at the same time. Like
the air bags, the seat belt
pretensioners will only function once.
While it is safer to use a crash-used
seat belt that was used in an
accident than no seat belt at all,
using a seat belt with an expended
pretensioner or load limiter loaded
reduces the safety available to you. If
the seat belt pretensioners are not
replaced, the risk of injury in a
collision will increase. Expended seat
belt pretensioners and air bags must
be replaced after any collision which
caused them to deploy. Additionally,
the load limiter will only limit loads
on the chest once in a collision and
this is another reason to have the
seat belts inspected. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the
seat belt pretensioners and air bags
after any collision.
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and can
activate in any accident mode with
sufficient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,
the load limiting function must be
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer
after any collision.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
qAir Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Light
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices is
dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable
which would prevent it from
activating in an accident. The
occupants or repairers could be
seriously injured.
If the air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
is working properly, the warning light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with non-
deactivated pretensioners is
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
dangerous. Unless all safety
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
procedures are followed, injury could
result. Ask an Authorized Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of the
pretensioner system or how to scrap
a pretensioner-equipped vehicle.
NOTE
l
WARNING
The pretensioner system will activate in a
moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal
collision. The pretensioner system for the
passenger is designed to only deploy in
accordance with the total seated weight on
the passenger seat. It will not activate in
most rollovers, side or rear impacts.
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
l
Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be
released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate
a fire. This gas normally has no effect on
occupants, however, those with sensitive
skin may experience light skin irritation. If
residue from the deployment of the air bags
or the pretensioner system gets on the skin
or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Extender
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless
it is necessary:
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fit properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use
the extender when it is required to
fasten the seat belt properly.
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a different vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and the user could be seriously
injured in an accident. Only use the
extender provided for you and for the
particular vehicle and seat. NEVER
use the extender in a different vehicle
or seat. If you sell your Mazda, do
not leave your seat belt extender in
the vehicle. It could be used
accidentally by the new owner of the
vehicle. After removing the seat belt
extender, discard it. Never use the
seat belt extender in any other
vehicle you may own in the future.
Do not use an extender that is too
long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and
the center of the user's body is less
than 15 cm (6 in).
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
NOTE
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender
and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt
extender is left connected, the seat belt
extender might get damaged as it will not
retract with the rest of the seat belt and can
easily fall out of the door when not in use and
be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning
light will not illuminate and function properly.
The seat belt warning light illuminates
and a beep sound will be heard if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Conditions of operation
Condition
Result
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard
position.
for about 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened while the warning
light and the beep sound are
activated.
The warning light
turns off and the beep
sound stops.
The driver's seat belt is
The warning light will
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be
position.
heard.
qBelt Minder
NOTE
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or
restore the seat belt minder.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Driver seated/Passenger not seated
Driver seated/Passenger seated
The belt minder is a supplemental
warning to the seat belt warning function.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the warning light/beep
operates to give you further reminders
according to the chart below.
The seat belt warning function reminds
the passenger to fasten the seat belt
according to the chart below.
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
(Driver)
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
(Passenger)
(0 ― 12 mph)
Indicator
Beep
Seat belt
Indicator
Beep
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
Placing heavy items on the passenger seat
may cause the passenger seat belt warning
function to operate depending on the
weight of the item.
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
NOTE
l
To allow the passenger seat weight sensor
to function properly, do not place and sit on
an additional seat cushion on the passenger
seat. The sensor may not function properly
because the additional seat cushion could
cause sensor interference.
l
When a small child sits on the passenger
seat, it is possible that neither the warning
light nor the warning beep operate.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should use seat belts, both lap and
shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to the center of
the vehicle.
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the passenger seat with the
air bag system activated.
If a small child or infant in the passenger seat ― particularly a child secured in a rear-
facing child-restraint system ― it is critically important that you consciously deactivate the
passenger air bag and not simply rely on the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
being turned on at all times. In a collision, the force of an air bag slamming the child-
restraint system rearwards could result in death to the child even if the child is properly
belted. Be alert to the operation of the indicator light and BE SURE THE PASSENGER
AIR BAG IS ALWAYS DEACTIVATED AS INDICATED BY PASSENGER AIR BAG
DEACTIVATION INDICATOR LIGHT.
Passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by the deployment of the passenger air bag, there
are two methods to deactivate the passenger air bag for a child's safety as follows ―
however the surest way to avoid the passenger air bag not deploying is to use the key and
turn off the passenger air bag and not rely on the passenger seat weight sensors, which will
also detect other loads or objects on and around the passenger seat;
Passenger air bag deactivation switch
This switch should be used to deactivate the passenger front and side air bags and also the
the passenger seat.
Make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the ON position except when a
child-restraint system is installed on the passenger seat.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch on page 2-39.
Passenger seat weight sensors
These sensors deactivate the passenger front and side air bags and also the passenger seat
belt pretensioner system when the total seated weight on the passenger seat is less than
approximately 30 kg (66 lb).
When an infant or small child is seated on the passenger seat, the system shuts off the
passenger air bag, so make sure the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
illuminates.
Refer to Passenger seat weight sensors on page 2-43.
LATCH Child-Restraint System
We have installed lower LATCH anchor points for LATCH style junior seats and infant
carriers that work without tethers only. Any other child-restraint system that has an upper
tether cannot be used in this vehicle because there is no tether anchor. A child-restraint
system with a tether cannot be properly mounted in this vehicle unless the child restraint
manufacturer provides instructions on mounting the child-restraint system with only seat
belts in automatic locking mode. Even then, without a tether, the child-restraint system may
move forward more easily in seat belts, further degrading the safety provided if you were to
put the child restraint in a tether anchor equipped rear seat of another vehicle. The seat and
head restraint is designed for maximum adult space utilization in this vehicle. Do not try to
secure the tether to something else in the vehicle, as too much slack will result and the
serious risk of injury or death to the child. Use the seat belts to properly secure the non-
tethered child-restraint systems other than the LATCH junior seats and non-tethered infant
carriers. Turn off the passenger air bag deactivation switch. To expose and use the lower
LATCH anchor points, which are affixed to the body and not the seat, slide the seat all the
way rearward which is the optimal vehicle seat position for all children in this two seat car.
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-
restraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the
vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors
for LATCH child-restraint systems.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a
sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag
forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be
slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
Always make sure the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light is illuminated
when using a rear-facing child-restraint system:
Seating a child in a rear-facing child-restraint system that is installed on the
passenger seat with the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light not
system. Always make sure the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light is
illuminated using the key to turn the passenger air bag off.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch on page 2-39.
Refer to Passenger seat weight sensors on page 2-43.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the passenger seat is dangerous:
This vehicle is equipped with both a passenger seat weight sensor and a passenger
air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-43). Even with the passenger seat weight
sensors, seating a child in a child-restraint system on the passenger seat under the
following conditions increases the danger of the passenger air bag deploying and
could result in serious injury or death to the child. These are among the reasons why
the passenger air bag should be turned off using the key.
Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the
passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lb) or more with a child in the child-
restraint system.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The passenger seat is moved backward, and it is pushed into luggage or other
items placed behind it.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the passenger seat and center
console.
Ø Any accessories, which might increase the total seated weight on the passenger
seat, are attached to the passenger seat.
seat as far back as possible:
In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to
the child. Make sure that the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the OFF
position. Refer to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch (page 2-39).
Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with side air
bags:
Allowing anyone to lean over or against the door is dangerous. If the vehicle is
equipped with side air bags, the impact of an inflating side air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the person. Children are more likely to sleep in the vehicle;
when they do, they are more at risk in the passenger's seat that has a side air bag
because they may slump over into the path of the seatback-mounted air bag.
Furthermore, leaning over or against the doors could block the side air bag and
eliminate the advantages of supplemental protection. Because the side air bag
deploys from the outboard shoulder of the seat, do not allow the child to lean over or
against the side window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Always use a child-restraint system designed for use without a tether:
Using a child-restraint system that requires a tether is dangerous. Your Mazda does
not have a child-restraint tether. The child-restraint system cannot be properly
secured. In a collision, it could move and injure other occupants as well as result in
serious injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot when exposed to direct
sunlight during warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them
before you or your child touches them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH
child-restraint systems behind the passenger seat that slide through the passenger seat when it is in
the fully rearward position. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system, refer to
“LATCH Child-Restraint Systems” (page 2-25).
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Before installing a child-restraint system,
make sure the passenger air bag
using the key to turn the passenger air bag
off.
Refer to Passenger seat weight sensors on
page 2-43.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation
Switch on page 2-39.
Installing a Child-
Restraint System
The passenger lap/shoulder belt can easily
be converted into the automatic locking
mode, which must be done to hold the
child-restraint system.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to “LATCH Child-Restraint
Systems” (page 2-25).
Follow these manufacturer's instructions
when installing a child-restraint system on
the passenger's seat, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped child-
restraint system to the LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “LATCH Child-
Restraint Systems” (page 2-25).
1. Make sure to remove articles from
behind the passenger seat that would
prevent the seat from sliding back fully,
and then slide the seat as far back as
possible.
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you
are not sure whether you have a LATCH
system, check in the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions and follow them
accordingly. Depending on the type of child-
restraint system, it may not employ seat belts
which are in automatic locking mode, however
if it uses an upper tether, it may not be
mounted properly in this vehicle as there is no
safe way to anchor the tether. Confirm whether
the child-restraint system can be used with seat
belts by reading the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the instructions on the child-
restraint system for belt routing
instructions.
3. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking
from the retractor will be heard during
retraction if the system is in automatic
locking mode. If the belt does not lock
the seat down tight, repeat this step.
WARNING
Always make sure the passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light is
illuminated when using a rear-facing
child-restraint system:
Seating a child in a rear-facing child-
restraint system that is installed on
the passenger seat with the
5. Make sure the passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light illuminates
by using the key to turn the passenger
air bag off after installing a child-
restraint system on the passenger seat.
passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
extremely dangerous. In an accident,
a air bag could inflate and cause
serious injuries or even death to the
child seated in the rear-facing child-
restraint system. Always make sure
the passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light is illuminated using
the key to turn the passenger air bag
off.
Refer to Passenger seat weight
sensors on page 2-43.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation Switch on page 2-39.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
NOTE
l
Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be
able to pull the shoulder belt out of the
retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the belt
fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
l
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts which
are in automatic locking mode, however if
it uses an upper tether, it may not be
mounted properly in this vehicle as there is
no safe way to anchor the tether. Confirm
whether the child-restraint system can be
used with seat belts by reading the child-
restraint system manufacturer's
instructions.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
LATCH Child-Restraint System
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems behind the passenger seat that slide through the passenger
seat when it is in the fully rearward position. Only LATCH junior seats and infant carriers
without upper tethers can be used in this position, as there is no good place to anchor the
tether due to this vehicle's design. Both anchors must be used when installing these lower
anchor only child-restraint systems, otherwise the seat will bounce around and put the child
in danger.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure any child-restraint system does not rely on an upper tether and then properly
secure those non-tethered seats according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the
seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in
an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH
child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child-
restraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and
the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could
move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no
seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
3. Secure the child-restraint system using
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
qLATCH Child-Restraint System
Installation Procedure
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction, however if
it uses an upper tether, it may not be
mounted properly in this vehicle as
there is no safe way to anchor the
tether. Confirm whether the child-
restraint system can be used with seat
belts by reading the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions.
Before installing a child-restraint system,
make sure the passenger air bag
using the key to turn the passenger air bag
off.
Refer to Passenger seat weight sensors on
page 2-43.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation
Switch on page 2-39.
4. Make sure the passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light illuminates
by using the key to turn the passenger
air bag off after installing a child-
restraint system on the passenger seat.
1. Make sure to remove articles from
behind the passenger seat that would
prevent the seat from sliding back fully,
and then slide the seat as far back as
possible to insert the LATCH lower
anchors between the seat bottom and
the seatback.
2. Expand the area between the seat
bottom and the seatback slightly to
verify the locations of the LATCH
lower anchors.
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors
indicate the locations of the LATCH lower
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint
system.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Always make sure the passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light is
illuminated when using a rear-facing
child-restraint system:
Seating a child in a rear-facing child-
restraint system that is installed on
the passenger seat with the
passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
extremely dangerous. In an accident,
a air bag could inflate and cause
serious injuries or even death to the
child seated in the rear-facing child-
restraint system. Always make sure
the passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light is illuminated using
the key to turn the passenger air bag
off.
Refer to Passenger seat weight
sensors on page 2-43.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation Switch on page 2-39.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 4 air bags. Please
verify the air bags equipped on your vehicle by locating the “SRS AIRBAG” location
indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
l
The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
l
The passenger dashboard (passenger air bag)
The outboard sides of the seatbacks (side air bags)í
l
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
in certain situations, so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
l
Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.
Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
l
inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal, side collisions that are not
l
severe enough to activate the air bags.
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
l
l
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
l
For some models, a passenger air bag deactivation switch is provided. This switch should
pretensioner system if a child-restraint system is installed on the passenger seat. Make sure
the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the ON position except when a child-
Switch on page 2-39.
Your vehicle is also equipped with a driver and passenger occupant classification
system. For details, refer to the driver and passenger occupant classification system
(page 2-43).
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by the deployment of the passenger air bag in the
unlikely event of an accident, there are two methods to deactivate the passenger air bag as
follows, however, the surest way to prevent the passenger air bag from deploying is to use
will also detect other loads or objects on and around the passenger seat.
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-17).
2-28
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the
installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
Do not use a child-restraint system which employs an upper tether because there is no
appropriate means to anchor the tether.
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be
expected to inflate only in the first accident, such as frontal, near frontal, side
collisions that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat
belts.
Always make sure the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light is illuminated
when using a rear-facing child-restraint system:
Seating a child in a rear-facing child-restraint system that is installed on the
passenger seat with the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light not
system. Always make sure the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light is
illuminated using the key to turn the passenger air bag off.
Refer to Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch on page 2-39.
Refer to Passenger seat weight sensors on page 2-43.
Do not sit too close to the driver and passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and passenger air bag modules or placing hands or
feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and passenger air bags inflate with
great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too close. The driver
should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The seat passenger
should keep both feet on the floor. Seat occupants should adjust their seats as far
back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn
properly.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not sit too close to a door or lean against doors in vehicles with side air bags:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them is extremely
dangerous. A side air bag inflates with great force and speed directly out of the
outboard shoulder of the seat and expands along the door on the side the car is hit.
Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning
against a window in the seats. Furthermore, sleeping up against the door or hanging
out the driver-side window while driving could block the side air bag and eliminate
the advantages of supplemental protection. Give the side air bags room to work by
sitting in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn
properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and passenger air bags
deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere
with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching things to the seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the seat
in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side air
bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Never use seat covers on the seats. Always keep the side air bag modules in your
seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not place luggage or other objects under the seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the
supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the
seats.
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could
get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,
bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The
air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate
unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.
Occupants could be seriously injured.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the
suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make
any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,
badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra
electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda
Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of seats. It
is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the bags do
not accidentally deploy, the driver seat slide position sensor and passenger seat
weight sensors are not damaged and that the seats retain an undamaged air bag
connection.
NOTE
l
When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.
Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries
on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
l
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that
familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System Components
Driver/Passenger dual stage inflators and air bags
Crash sensor, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Seat belt pretensioner and load limiting systems (page 2-12)
Front air bag sensor
Side crash sensors
Side inflators and air bags
Passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-43)
Passenger air bag deactivation switch (page 2-39)
Passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-43)
Passenger seat weight sensor control module
Driver and passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-47)
Driver seat slide position sensor (page 2-43)
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
How the SRS Air Bags Work
Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags are
designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.
The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to
the seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.
qSeat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near
frontal collisions.
qDriver Air Bag
The driver's air bag is mounted in the steering wheels.
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, the
driver's air bag inflates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chest
caused by directly hitting the steering wheel.
The driver's dual-stage air bag controls air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qPassenger Air Bag
The passenger air bag is mounted in the passenger dashboard.
The inflation mechanism for the passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag, as
mentioned above. In addition, the passenger air bag is designed to only deploy in
accordance with the total seated weight on the passenger seat. For details, refer to the driver
and passenger occupant classification system (page 2-43).
qSide Air Bagsí
The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
system inflates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side air
directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window. In addition, the front passenger side
air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat. For details, refer to the driver and front passenger occupant classification
system (page 2-43).
2-34
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qAir Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light
If the air bag/seat belt pretensioner system is working properly, the warning light
illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is
cranked. The warning light turns off after a specified period of time.
A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly
illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. If any of these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
The system may not work in an accident.
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner
could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria
This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type
of collision.
(The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions.)
Types of collision
A severe frontal/near frontal collision
A severe side collision
A rear collision
SRS
equipment
Seat belt
pretensioner
X
*1(both sides)
Driver air
bag
X
No air bag and front seat
belt pretensioner will be
activated in a rear collision.
Passenger air
bag
X*1
Side air
bagí
X*1(impact side only)
X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.
*1: The passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to
deploy depending on the condition of the total seated weight on the passenger seat or the
status of the passenger air bag deactivation switch.
2-36
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to SRS Air Bag
In severe collisions such as those described previously in “SRS Air Bag Deployment
Criteria”, the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents,
the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.
Limitations to front/near front collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not be
detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
Impacts involving trees or poles
Rear-ending or running under a truck’s tail gate
Limitations to side collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as
severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles
Side impacts involving trees or poles
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Roll-over
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch
WARNING
Do not deactivate the passenger air bag unnecessarily:
Unnecessary deactivation of the passenger air bag is dangerous. If turned off
unnecessarily, the passenger will not receive the added protection of the air bag.
Serious injuries or even death could occur. With the exception of passengers fitting
the categories described below, do not turn the air bag deactivation switch to the
OFF position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. The switch is
located in the position shown in the figure below. The switch must be used to deactivate
the passenger front and side air bags and also the passenger seat belt pretensioner system
when the occupant of the passenger seat fits into one of the following categories (as
described in the request form for the passenger air bag deactivation switch, the appendix B
to part 595 of National Highway Traffic Safety Administration [NHTSA]):
l
Infants (less than one year old; for all types of restraint, but particularly the rear-facing
child restraint.)
Children aged 1 to 12
People with certain medical conditions which, according to his/her physician, could be
l
l
adversely affected by air-bag activation
For more government release information on air bag deactivation, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for the occupant categories as described in the request form for the air bag
deactivation switch in the NHTSA rules.
The air bag deactivation switch turns off the passenger front and side air bags and the also
seat belt pretensioner system. Make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the
ON position except when a passenger fitting the previous categories occupies the front
passenger seat.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation Switch
Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation Indicator Light
Passenger Front and Side Passenger Seat Belt
Air Bag Operation
Pretensioner System
OFF position
ON position
ON
Deactivate
Deactivate
OFF
Ready
Ready
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light comes on for a specified period of time.
If the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the OFF position, the indicator light
remains on to warn that the passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt
pretensioner system have been deactivated.
In addition to using the key to deactivate the passenger front and side air bags and the also
seat belt pretensioner system, the passenger front and side air bags and the also seat belt
pretensioner system is also deactivated and the passenger air bag deactivation indicator
light is illuminated automatically when the total seated weight on the passenger seat is less
than 30 kg (66 lb).
NOTE
Have the passenger air bag deactivation switch inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any of
these conditions occur:
l
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate for a specified period of
time when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
l
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not remain on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the OFF position.
l
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator remains on when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position and the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the ON position.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qTo Deactivate the Passenger Air Bag
Before driving, always confirm that the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the
appropriate position according to your requirements.
WARNING
Do not leave the key in the front passenger air bag deactivation switch:
(With advanced key)
Unintentional deactivation of the passenger air bag is dangerous. In an accident, the
passenger will not be properly protected. Serious injuries or even death could occur.
To avoid unintentional deactivation, always use the auxiliary key stored in the
advanced key currently being used to operate the passenger air bag deactivation
switch. After deactivating the air bag, put the auxiliary key back into the advanced
key. That way you will not leave the key in the passenger air bag deactivation
switch.
(Without advanced key)
Unintentional deactivation of the passenger air bag is dangerous. In an accident, the
passenger will not be properly protected. Serious injuries or even death could occur.
To avoid unintentional deactivation, always use the same key to operate the
passenger air bag deactivation switch and the ignition switch, that way you will not
leave the key in the passenger air bag deactivation switch.
1. Insert the key into the passenger air bag deactivation switch and turn the key clockwise
until the key points to OFF.
2. Remove the key.
3. Make sure the air bag deactivation indicator light remains illuminated when the ignition
is in the ON position.
NOTE
(With advanced key)
After operating the passenger air bag deactivation switch, put the auxiliary key back into the
advanced key.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
The passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt pretensioner system will remain
deactivated until the passenger air bag deactivation switch is turned to the ON position.
qTo Ready the Passenger Air Bag
Before driving, always confirm that the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the
appropriate position according to your requirements.
1. Insert the key into the passenger air bag deactivation switch and turn the key
counterclockwise until the key points to ON.
2. Remove the key.
3. Make sure the air bag deactivation indicator light turns off after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
NOTE
(With advanced key)
After operating the passenger air bag deactivation switch, put the auxiliary key back into the
advanced key.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Driver and Passenger Occupant Classification System
First, please read “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions” (page 2-28)
carefully.
qDriver Seat Slide Position Sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver seat slide position sensor as a part of the
supplemental restraint system. The sensor is located under the driver seat. The sensor
determines whether the driver seat is fore or aft of a reference position and sends the seat
deployment of the driver air bag depending on how close the driver seat is to the steering
wheel.
The air bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes if the sensor has a possible
malfunction (page 2-35).
qPassenger Seat Weight Sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger seat weight sensors as a part of the supplemental
restraint system. These sensors are located under both of the passenger seat rails. These
sensors determine the total seated weight on the passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed
to prevent the passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system from
deploying if the total seated weight is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lbs).
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the passenger air bag, the system
deactivates the passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt pretensioner system
when:
l
There is no passenger in the passenger seat. (The passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light does not illuminate.)
The total seated weight on the passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lbs).
l
(The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.)
This system shuts off the passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates
according to the following table.
The air bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible malfunction. If this
happens, the passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system will not
deploy.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the passenger front and side air bags and
seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
If the passenger weight sensors are normal, the indicator light illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. For a specified of time it goes out.
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:
Total seated weight on the
passenger seat
Empty (Not occupied)*
Passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light
Passenger front and side
air bags
Passenger seat belt
pretensioner system
OFF
Deactivated
Deactivated
Less than approx. 30 kg
(66 lbs)
ON
Deactivated
Deactivated
Approx. 42 kg (93 lbs) or
more
OFF
Ready
If the passenger air bag has been deactivated using the key, the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light will
remain illuminated as long you leave the passenger air bag turned off, and the chart above no longer applies.
Refer to Passenger air bag deactivation switch on page 2-39.
* If the passenger seat belt is buckled, the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, however this
does not indicate a malfunction.
switch is turned to the ON position and does not illuminate as indicated in the above chart,
do not allow a child to sit in the passenger seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident. You must deactivate
the passenger air bag using the key (page 2-39) and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Do not decrease the total seated weight on the passenger seat:
When an adult or large child sits on the passenger seat, decreasing the total seated
weight on the passenger seat from the total seated weight of approximately 42 kg
(93 lbs) required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The passenger seat weight
sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition and the passenger front
and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system will not deploy during an
accident. The passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bag,
which could result in serious injury. Decreasing the total seated weight on the
passenger seat from the total seated weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) could
result in an air bag not deploying under the following conditions, for example:
Ø Luggage or other items placed under the passenger seat or between the passenger
seat and center console that push up the passenger seat bottom.
Ø The passenger seat occupant sits in a manner such that the occupant's entire
weight is not placed on the seat sitting too close to the door.
Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the passenger
seat are attached to the passenger seat.
The passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the total seated weight on the passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66 lbs)
and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lbs).
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not increase the total seated weight on the passenger seat:
When an infant or small child sits on the passenger seat, increasing the total seated
weight on the passenger seat from the total seated weight of approximately 30 kg
(66 lbs) is dangerous. The passenger seat weight sensors will detect the increased
total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected deployment of the
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system in an accident
and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated weight on the passenger
seat beyond the total seated weight of approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) could result in
the passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system deployment
in an accident under the following conditions, for example:
Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the
passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) or more.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The passenger seat is moved backward, and it is pushed into luggage or other
items placed behind it.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the passenger seat and center
console.
Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the passenger
seat are attached to the passenger seat.
The passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the total seated weight on the passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66 lbs)
and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lbs).
CAUTION
Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the
sensors in the seat bottoms:
Ø
Do not place sharp objects on the seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on
them.
Ø
Do not spill any liquids on the seats or under the seats.
Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
Ø
Adjust the seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
If you place your child on the passenger seat, secure the child-restraint system
properly and slide the passenger seat as far back as possible.
Ø
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
l
The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the passenger front and side
air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
l
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or other
suddenly.
l
l
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the total
seated weight on the passenger seat changes.
You must deactivate the passenger air bag using the key (page 2-39) and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
qDriver and Passenger Buckle Switches
The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are
securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Monitoring and Maintenance
qConstant Monitoring
The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system:
l
Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Front air bag sensor
l
l
Air bag modules
Side crash sensorsí
l
l
Air bag/Seat belt pretensioner system warning light
Seat belt pretensioner and load limiting systems
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
Related wiring
Front passenger air bag deactivation switch
Driver seat slide position sensor
Front passenger seat weight sensors
Front passenger seat weight sensor control module
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches
The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position and continues while the vehicle is being
driven.
qMaintenance
The air bag systems do not require regular maintenance. But if any of the following occurs,
take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible:
l
The air bag system warning light flashes.
The air bag system warning light remains illuminated.
The air bag system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned
l
l
to the ON position.
The air bags have deployed.
l
l
when you manually deactivate the passenger air bag with the key.
For more details about passenger air bag deactivation, refer to:
l
Passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-43)
Passenger air bag deactivation switch (page 2-39)
l
2-48
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must be
replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only a
trained Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they
will work in any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bag
or pretensioner unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of any
subsequent accident which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as the seats, dashboard, the steering wheel or parts
on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge, containing air bag
parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential air bag components. The
air bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer remove these parts.
Dispose of the air bag properly:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely
dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury can result. Ask an
Authorized Mazda Dealer how to safely dispose of an air bag or how to scrap an air
bag equipped vehicle.
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint
system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a
certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to “Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)”
(page 9-2).
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
3
of various parts.
Warning and Beep Sounds ...................................................... 3-19
Door Locks ............................................................................. 3-30
Trunk Lid ................................................................................ 3-33
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ........................................................... 3-40
Hood ....................................................................................... 3-42
Security System ........................................................................... 3-63
Immobilizer System (with Advanced Key) ............................. 3-63
Steering Wheel and Mirrors ...................................................... 3-73
Steering Wheel ........................................................................ 3-73
Mirrors .................................................................................... 3-73
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Advanced Keysí
The advanced keyless functions (advanced keyless entry and start system) enables the
following operations while the advanced key is being carried (page 3-7).
l
Locking/unlocking the doors, and opening the trunk lid, without operating the key.
Starting the engine without operating the key.
l
Additional functions are available using the buttons on the advanced key.
Refer to Operation Using Advanced Key Functions on page 3-14.
l
The following operations are possible using the transmitter of the keyless entry system
from a distance (Lock/Unlock/Trunk/Panic button):
l
Locking/unlocking the doors.
l
Opening the trunk lid.
Opening the power windowsí.
l
l
Turning on the alarm.
l
Locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk lid, or starting the engine using the
auxiliary key.
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with children and keep them in a place where
your children will not find or play with them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous. This could result in someone
being badly injured or even killed. Children may find these new kinds of keys to be
an interesting toy to play with and could cause the power windows or other controls
to operate, or even make the vehicle move.
Radio waves from the advanced key may affect medical equipment such as
pacemakers:
Before using the advanced key near people who use medical equipment, ask the
medical equipment manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the
advanced key will affect the equipment.
NOTE
l
The driver must carry the advanced key to ensure the system functions properly.
l
Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-63) for information regarding keys and engine starting.
l
(With theft-deterrent system)
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-71) for information regarding keys and the prevention of
vehicle and vehicle contents theft.
3-2
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Lock button Unlock button
Trunk button
Panic button
Auxiliary key
Key code number plate
Operation indicator light
A code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set; detach this plate and store it
in a safe place (not in the vehicle) for use if you need to make a replacement key.
Also write down the code number and keep it in another safe and handy place, but not in
the vehicle.
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer with the code number ready.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
CAUTION
Ø Because the advanced key uses low-intensity radio waves, it may not function
correctly under the following conditions:
Ø
The advanced key is carried with communication devices such as cellular
phones.
The advanced key contacts or is covered by a metal object.
The advanced key is near electronic devices such as personal computers or cell
phones.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Non-Mazda genuine electronic equipment is installed in the vehicle.
There is equipment which discharges radio waves near the vehicle.
If the vehicle is near equipment such as wireless pay devices installed at certain
gas stations.
Ø The advanced key may consume battery power excessively if it receives high-
intensity radio waves. Do not place the advanced key near electronic devices such
as televisions or personal computers.
Ø To avoid damage to the advanced key, DO NOT:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the advanced key.
Get the advanced key wet.
Disassemble the advanced key.
Expose the advanced key to high temperatures on places such as the
dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.
Place heavy objects on the advanced key.
Put the advanced key in an ultrasonic cleaner.
Put any magnetized objects close to the advanced key.
Ø
Ø
Ø
NOTE
l
Battery life is about one year. Be sure to replace the battery as soon as you see the green KEY
indicator light in the instrument cluster begin flashing for 30 seconds after turning off the engine,
otherwise, you will not be able to start the engine using the advanced keyless start system once the
battery is completely dead Refer to KEY warning light (red) on page 5-49. If this occurs, you will
have to either force-start the engine or use the auxiliary key Refer to Advanced Key Battery Dead
Warning on page 3-20.
l
Additional advanced keys can be obtained at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 6 advanced keys
can be used with the advanced keyless functions per vehicle.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Replacing the battery at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent
damage to the advanced key. If replacing
the battery by yourself, follow the
instruction below.
qAdvanced Key Maintenance
CAUTION
Ø Make sure the battery is installed
with the correct pole facing
upward. Battery leakage could
occur if it is not installed correctly.
Ø When replacing the battery, be
careful not to bend the electrical
terminals or get oil on them. Also
be careful not to get dirt in the
transmitter as it could be
damaged.
Replacing the advanced key battery
1. Pull out the auxiliary key.
Ø There is the danger of explosion if
the battery is not correctly
replaced.
Ø Replace only with the same type
battery (CR2025 or equivalent).
Ø Dispose of used batteries
according to the following
instructions.
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the
groove shown in the figure and rotate
the screwdriver to open the cover
slightly.
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
Never disassemble.
Never throw the battery into
fire or water.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Never deform or crush.
The following conditions indicate that the
battery power is low:
l
The KEY indicator light (green) flashes
in the instrument cluster for about 30
seconds after the engine is turned off.
The system does not operate and the
l
operation indicator light on the
transmitter does not flash when the
buttons are pressed.
l
The system's operational range is
reduced.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
3. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the
gap between the cover and the
5. Insert a new battery with the positive
pole facing up, and then cover the
battery with the battery cap.
transmitter, and then rotate the
screwdriver to detach the cover.
6. Close the cover.
4. Remove the battery cap, then remove
the battery.
7. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Operation Using Advanced
CAUTION
Ø Be careful not to allow the rubber
ring shown in the figure to be
scratched or damaged.
Keyless Functions
qOperational Range
Ø If the rubber ring detaches,
reattach it before inserting a new
battery.
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the advanced key is being
carried.
NOTE
Rubber ring
When the battery power is low, or in places
where there are high-intensity radio waves or
noise, the operational range may become
narrower or the system may not operate.
Locking, unlocking the doors
The operational range for locking/
unlocking the doors is an area of up to 80
cm (2.6 ft) from the center of the door
handles.
qService
Exterior transmitter
If you have a problem with the advanced
keyless functions, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If your advanced key is lost or stolen,
bring all remaining advanced keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make
the lost or stolen advanced key
inoperative.
Operational range
NOTE
CAUTION
The system may not operate if you are too
close to the windows, door handles.
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Opening the trunk lid
NOTE
l
The trunk is out of the operational range,
however, starting the engine may be
possible.
The operational range for opening the
trunk lid is an area of up to 80 cm (2.6 ft)
from the center of the trunk lid.
l
The engine may not start if the advanced
key is placed in the following areas:
Exterior transmitter
l
Around the dashboard
l
In the storage compartments such as the
glove box
On the rear parcel shelf
l
l
Starting the engine may be possible even if
the advanced key is outside of the vehicle
and extremely close to a door and window,
however, always start the engine from the
driver's seat.
Operational range
If the vehicle is started and driven away
while the advanced key is not in the vehicle,
the vehicle will not restart after it is turned
off and the ignition switch is turned to the
Lock position.
If the advanced key is detected within
operational range, the operation indicator
light on the transmitter flashes
Starting the engine
The operational range for starting the
engine includes nearly the entire cabin
area.
l
Interior transmitter
momentarily.
qLocking, Unlocking the Doors
with Request Switch
Both doors can be locked/unlocked by
pressing the request switch on a door
while the advanced key is being carried.
Operational range
Request switch
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
To lock
NOTE
l
Confirm that both doors are securely
locked.
Both doors cannot be locked when any
door is open.
To lock the doors, press the request
switch. A beep sound will be heard once
and the hazard warning lights will flash
once.
l
l
A beep sound is heard for confirmation
when the doors are locked/unlocked using
the request switch. If you prefer, the beep
sound can be turned off (page 3-21).
The setting can be changed so that the
doors are locked automatically without
pressing the request switch (page 3-21).
(Auto-lock function)
NOTE
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash once to
indicate that the doors are locked.
The hazard warning lights only flash when the
theft deterrent system is armed.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-71.
l
A beep sound is heard when both doors are
closed while the advanced key is being
carried. Both doors are locked
To unlock
automatically after about 3 seconds when
the advanced key is out of the operational
range. Also, the hazard warning lights flash
once. (Even if the driver is in the
operational range, both doors are locked
automatically after about 30 seconds.)
If you are out of the operational range
before the doors are completely closed or
another advanced key is left in the vehicle,
the auto-lock function will not work.
Always make sure that both doors are
closed and locked before leaving the
vehicle.
(Auto re-lock function)
After unlocking doors by pressing the
request switch, both doors will
automatically lock and the hazard warning
light will flash if any of the following
operations are not performed within about
30 seconds.
Driver's door request switch
To unlock the driver's door, press the
request switch. A beep sound will be
heard twice and the hazard warning lights
will flash twice.
To unlock both doors , press the request
switch again within 3 seconds and two
more beep sounds will be heard.
NOTE
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
indicate that the doors are unlocked.
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights only flash when the
theft deterrent system is turned off.
the theft deterrent system has been properly
turned off.
l
l
A door is opened.
The auxiliary key is inserted into the
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-71.
l
ignition switch.
The start knob is pushed.
Passenger door request switch
l
To unlock the doors, press the request
switch. A beep sound will be heard twice
and the hazard warning lights will flash
twice.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
qOpening the Trunk Lid with
qStarting the Engine
Request Switch
Ignition switch positions
The trunk lid can be opened by pressing
the request switch on the under side of the
trunk lid above the license plate while the
advanced key is being carried.
As there is no a traditional key, some of
the ignition switch functions are different.
Request switch
Start knob
LOCK (Released)
The steering wheel locks to help protect
against theft.
NOTE
l
If the advanced key is left in the trunk, the
trunk lid will close, however, the trunk lid
can be opened using the request switch and
the vehicle could be stolen.
LOCK (Depressed)
The ignition switch can be turned to the
ACC position when the KEY indicator
light (green) illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
l
(With power retractable hardtop)
The trunk lid can only be opened when the
power retractable hardtop is fully opened/
closed. Open/close the power retractable
hardtop completely before opening the
trunk lid.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
ON
WARNING
This is the normal running position after
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key to LOCK position, set the
parking brake and make sure the shift
lever is in P with an automatic
transmission or in 1 or R with a manual
transmission:
the engine is started. The warning lights
(except brakes) should be inspected
before the engine is started (page 5-40).
NOTE
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This
does not indicate an abnormality.
It is important to place the key in the
LOCK position even if you are not
removing the key from the ignition or
leaving the vehicle. Leaving the key
in other positions will disable some of
the vehicle security systems and run
the battery down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and shifting the shift lever to P with
an automatic transmission, or to 1 or
R with a manual transmission is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur. This could
cause an accident.
START
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the start knob;
then it returns to the ON position. The
brake warning light can be checked after
the engine is started (page 5-40).
NOTE
l
If turning the ignition switch is difficult,
jiggle the steering wheel from side to side.
l
(Automatic transmission)
The ignition switch cannot be turned from
the ACC position to the LOCK position
when the shift lever is not in P.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel unlocks and some
electrical accessories will operate.
NOTE
The Advanced Keyless Entry System does not
function in the ACC position, and the doors
will not lock/unlock using the transmitter or
request switches even if the advanced key is
carried away from the vehicle.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Starting the engine
5. (Manual transmission)
Depress the clutch pedal all the way
and shift into neutral.
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while
cranking the engine.
(Automatic transmission)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
NOTE
l
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark
ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
requirements regulating the impulse
electrical field strength of radio noise.
l
The advanced key must be carried because
the advanced key carries an immobilizer
chip that must communicate with the engine
controls at short range.
NOTE
(Manual transmission)
The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal
is not depressed all the way.
(Automatic transmission)
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is
not in P or N.
l
When starting the engine, be sure the start
knob is securely attached before trying to
operate it. If the knob becomes detached
from the ignition switch, re-attach it by
pushing it on to the ignition switch.
6. Push the start knob slowly all the way
in.
1. Make sure the advanced key is being
carried.
2. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
7. Verify that the KEY indicator light
9. Turn the ignition switch from the ACC
position to the START position and
hold (up to 10 seconds at a time) until
the engine starts.
(green) illuminates in the instrument
cluster. The KEY warning light (red)
means you cannot continue to start the
engine using the Advanced Keyless
System. You may have to use the
auxiliary key instead (page 3-22).
CAUTION
Do not try the starter for more than
10 seconds at a time. If the engine
stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds
before trying again. Otherwise, you
may damage the starter and drain
the battery.
10. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about 10 seconds.
NOTE
In the following cases, the KEY warning light
(red) illuminates and the engine will not start.
NOTE
l
In extremely cold weather or after the
l
The advanced key battery is dead.
vehicle has not been driven in several days,
let the engine warm up without operating
the accelerator.
l
The advanced key is out of operational
range.
l
The advanced key is placed in areas where
l
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
it is difficult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer similar to
should be started without use of the
accelerator.
l
Turning off the engine
the advanced key is in the operational
range.
1. Move the shift lever to the P position
(Automatic transmission).
8. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position while pushing the start knob
in.
2. Turn the ignition switch from the ON
position to the ACC position.
NOTE
When the engine is turned off and the ignition
switch it turned from the ACC position to the
LOCK position, the KEY indicator light
(green) flashes in the instrument cluster for
about 30 seconds if the battery power of the
advanced key is low. Replace the battery with a
new one.
Refer to Battery Replacement (page 3-7).
3. Push in the start knob from the ACC
position and turn it to the LOCK
position.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Operation Using Advanced
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
Key Functions
qKeyless Entry System
This system uses the more traditional
keyless entry buttons to remotely lock and
unlock the doors and opens the trunk lid,
and opens the power windows.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
NOTE
l
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, the ignition switch has to
be pushed in from the ACC position and
turned. Without being pushed in, the
ignition switch stops at the ACC position
and the vehicle battery may be discharged
if the ignition switch is left in the ACC
position. When leaving the vehicle, make
sure the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
NOTE
l
The keyless entry system is designed to
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due
to local conditions.
l
If the vehicle is left with the ignition switch
not in the LOCK position, a beep sound is
heard and the indicator light flashes to
notify the driver.
l
The system does not operate when the
auxiliary key is in the ignition switch.
l
With the start knob installed in the LOCK
position, the system is fully operational. If
the ignition switch is not in the LOCK
position or the start knob is pushed in, the
system does not operate.
Refer to Warning Beep (page 3-19).
l
Both doors cannot be locked by pressing
the lock button while either door is open.
The hazard warning lights will also not
flash.
l
(With power retractable hardtop)
The trunk lid cannot be operated remotely if
the power retractable hardtop is not fully
opened or fully closed.
l
If the transmitter does not operate when
pressing a button or the operational range
becomes too small, the battery may be
dead. To install a new battery, refer to
Maintenance (page 3-5).
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Transmitter
NOTE
l
Both doors cannot be locked when either
Lock button
Operation indicator light
door is open.
l
Confirm that both doors are locked visually
or audibly by use of the double click.
Unlock button
Trunk button
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button. A beep will be heard twice
and the hazard warning lights will flash
twice.
Panic button
To unlock both doors, press the unlock
button again within 3 seconds and two
more beep sounds will be heard.
NOTE
The unlock button can be used to open the
power windows. Refer to Opening the Power
Windows from Outside (page 3-38).
NOTE
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
indicate that both doors are unlocked.
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights only flash when the
theft deterrent system is turned off.
the theft deterrent system has been properly
turned off.
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors, press the lock button. A
beep sound will be heard once and the
hazard warning lights will flash once.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-71.
To confirm that both doors have been
locked, press the lock button again within
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,
the horn will sound.
NOTE
(Auto re-lock function)
After unlocking with the transmitter, both
doors will automatically lock and the hazard
warning light will flash if any of the following
operations are not performed within about 30
seconds. If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent
system, the hazard warning lights will flash for
confirmation.
NOTE
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash once to
indicate that both doors are locked.
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights only flash when the
theft deterrent system is armed.
the doors are locked before the theft-deterrent
system is properly armed.
l
A door is opened.
l
The auxiliary key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
l
The start knob is pressed.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-71.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Trunk button
To open the trunk, press the trunk button
for more than 1 second.
NOTE
(With power retractable hardtop)
The trunk lid can only be opened when the
power retractable hardtop is fully opened/
closed. Open/close the power retractable
hardtop completely before opening the trunk
lid.
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, pressing the panic button will
activate the vehicle's alarm.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether either door
is open or closed.
(Turning on the alarm)
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the
following will occur:
l
The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights flash.
l
NOTE
However, if the driver is too close to the
vehicle the panic button may not function.
(Turning off the alarm)
The alarm stops by pressing any button on
the transmitter.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Declaration of Conformity
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
qAuxiliary Key Function
Advanced Key Suspend
Use the auxiliary key stored in the
advanced key in the event of a dead
transmitter battery or malfunction.
Function
If one key is left in the vehicle or trunk
and the second key is used to lock the
vehicle, the functions of the advanced key
left in the vehicle or the trunk are
temporarily suspended to prevent theft of
the vehicle.
Removing the auxiliary key
Pull out the auxiliary key from the
advanced key.
The following are inoperable:
l
Starting the engine using the start
knob.
l
Operating the request switches.
To restore these functions, perform any
one of the following:
l
Press the lock or unlock button on the
advanced key which has had its
functions suspended.
While carrying another advanced key,
l
push in the start knob until the KEY
indicator light (green) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Insert the auxiliary key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position.
Locking, unlocking the doors
The doors can be locked/unlocked using
the auxiliary key, refer to Locking,
Unlocking with Key (page 3-30).
l
Opening the trunk lid
The trunk lid can be opened using the
auxiliary key, refer to Opening and
Closing the Trunk Lid (page 3-33).
CAUTION
Do not open the trunk while the
power retractable hardtop is
opening/closing. The power
retractable hardtop and trunk lid
mechanisms could be damaged.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started with the
auxiliary key, refer to Ignition Switch
(page 5-2).
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
qAdvanced Key Removed from
Warning and Beep Sounds
Vehicle Warning Beep
q
System Malfunction Warning Beep
Under the following conditions, a beep
sound will be heard and the KEY warning
light (red) will flash continuously when
the start knob has not been returned to the
LOCK position to notify the driver that
the advanced key has been removed. The
KEY warning light (red) will stop flashing
when the advanced key is back inside the
vehicle:
If any malfunction occurs in the advanced
keyless function, the KEY warning light
(red) in the instrument cluster illuminates
continuously and beep sounds will be
heard.
CAUTION
If the KEY warning light (red) remains
illuminated, do not continue to drive
the vehicle with the advanced keyless
function. Park the vehicle in a safe
place and use the auxiliary key to
continue driving the vehicle. Have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Ignition Switch (page 5-2).
l
The start knob has not been returned to
the LOCK position, the driver's door is
open, and the advanced key is removed
from the vehicle. (A beep sound will be
heard 3 times.)
However the beep sound will be heard
continuously when the start knob is in
the ACC position and the door is open
due to the activation of the warning
beep sound indicating that the start
knob is not in the LOCK position.
qStart Knob Not in LOCK
l
Warning Beep
The start knob has not been returned to
the LOCK position and all the doors
are closed after removing the advanced
key from the vehicle. (A beep sound
will be heard 6 times.)
If the start knob is in the ACC position
and the driver's door is opened, a
continuous beep sound will be heard to
notify the driver that the start knob has not
been returned to the LOCK position. In
this case, the keyless entry system does
not operate, the car cannot be locked, and
the battery will run down.
NOTE
Because the advanced key utilizes low-intensity
radio waves, the Advanced Key Removed From
Vehicle Warning may activate if the advanced
key is carried together with a metal object or it
is placed in a poor signal reception area
within the vehicle.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
l
The advanced key is placed in areas
qRequest Switch Inoperable
where it is difficult for the system to
detect the signal (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer
similar to the advanced key is in the
operational range.
Warning Beep
If the request switch for a front door is
pressed under the following conditions
while the advanced key is being carried, a
beep will be heard 6 times to indicate that
the front doors cannot be locked.
l
qAdvanced Key Left-in-trunk
l
A door is open (door ajar included).
The start knob has not been returned to
Warning Beep
l
the LOCK position.
The auxiliary key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
If the advanced key is left in the trunk
compartment with both doors locked and
the trunk lid closed, a beep sound is heard
for about 10 seconds to remind the driver
the advanced key has been left in the
trunk compartment. If this happens, open
the trunk lid by pressing the request
switch and remove the advanced key. An
advanced key removed from the trunk
may have been temporarily suspended. To
restore the advanced key function,
perform the applicable procedure (page
3-18).
l
qAdvanced Key Battery Dead
Warning
When the start knob is returned to the
ACC or LOCK position from the ON
position, the KEY indicator light (green)
flashes for approximately 30 seconds
indicating that the remaining battery
before the advanced key becomes
unusable.
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance
(page 3-5).
qAdvanced Key Left-in-vehicle
Warning Beep
NOTE
If an advanced key is left in the vehicle
cabin and both doors are locked using a
separate advanced key, a beep sound is
heard for about 10 seconds to remind the
driver that the advanced key has been left
in the vehicle cabin. If this happens, the
doors lock but the functions of the
may be temporarily suspended. Perform
the following procedure to restore the
functions of the advanced key (page
3-18).
The advanced key can be set so that the KEY
indicator light (green) does not flash even if
the battery power is low.
Refer to Setting Change (page 3-21).
q
Engine Start Not Permitted Warning
Under the following conditions, the KEY
warning light (red) flashes to inform the
driver that the start knob will not rotate to
the ACC position even if it is pushed in
from the LOCK position.
l
The advanced key battery is dead.
The advanced key is not within
l
operational range.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Setting Change (Function Customization)
The following function settings are possible. These settings can only be changed by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
After Setting
Change
Setting
Function
At Initial Setting
Advanced key battery KEY indicator light (green) flashes to indicate
dead indicator that the advanced key battery power is low.
Lock/unlock operation A beep sound is heard to confirm that both doors
Activated
Deactivated
confirmation beep
or the trunk lid have been locked/unlocked.
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
sound*1
When both doors are closed and the advanced key
is being carried and out of operational range, both
the doors automatically lock after 3 seconds.
(Even if the driver is in the operational range,
both doors are locked automatically after about 30
seconds.)
Autolock function*2
Deactivated
*1: When the autolock function is operating, the warning sound will be heard regardless of the setting.
*2: When the autolock function is enabled, windows will not automatically close. You must close them before
leaving vehicle.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated
Under the following conditions, warning beeps are heard and a warning/indicator light in
the instrument cluster illuminates to notify the driver of improper operation of the
advanced key to prevent theft of the vehicle (page 3-19).
Warning
What to check
When a door is open, a continuous beep sound will be Check whether the start knob has been returned to the
heard.
LOCK position.
When a door is open, 3 beep sounds are heard, and the
KEY warning light (red) in the instrument cluster
flashes.
Check whether the advanced key has been removed
from the vehicle.
When a door is closed, a beep sound is heard 6 times,
and the KEY warning light (red) in the instrument
cluster flashes.
Check whether the advanced key has been removed
from the vehicle.
When locking the doors or closing the trunk, the chime Check whether the advanced key has not been left in the
sounds for about 10 seconds.
vehicle or the trunk.
Check whether the advanced key has been left in the
vehicle.
When attempting to lock the doors, a beep sound is
heard.
Check whether a door is open.
The advanced key battery power is low. Replace the
battery with a new one.
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance on page 3-5.
When the KEY indicator light (green) flashes in the
instrument cluster.
The advanced key is malfunctioning. Park the vehicle in
When the KEY warning light (red) remains illuminated a safe place, and use the auxiliary key to continue
in the instrument cluster.
driving the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Without keyless entry system
Keys (without Advanced Key)
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. Children may find these new
kinds of keys to be an interesting toy
to play with and could cause the
power windows or other controls to
operate, or even make the vehicle
move.
Key code number plate
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key.
NOTE
l
Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-67) for
information regarding keys and engine
starting.
l
Write down the code number and keep it in
a separate, safe and convenient place, but
not in the vehicle.
l
(With theft-deterrent system)
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-71)
for information regarding keys and the
prevention of vehicle and vehicle contents
theft.
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have your code number
ready.
l
Some types of key chains cannot be
attached to the retractable type key. In this
case, use the key ring provided with the
transmitter which has the key code number
plate attached.
The keys operate all locks.
With keyless entry system
Retractable
type key
Key code number plate
Key ring
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Key extend/retract method (Retractable
type key)
Keyless Entry System (with
Retractable Type Key)í
To extend the key, press the release
button.
This system remotely locks and unlocks
the doors, and opens the power windows.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transmitter,
do not:
Ø Drop the transmitter.
Ø Get the transmitter wet.
Ø Disassemble the transmitter.
Ø Expose the transmitter to any kind
of magnetic field.
Ø Expose the transmitter to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
To retract the key, rotate it into the holder
while pressing the release button.
3-24
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Lock button
l
The keyless entry system is designed to
To lock the doors, press the lock button.
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due
to local conditions.
To confirm that both doors have been
locked, press the lock button again within
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,
the horn will sound.
l
l
The system does not operate when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Doors can be locked by pressing the lock
button while a door is open. However, the
hazard warning lights will not flash and the
horn will not sound.
NOTE
l
Pressing the transmitter lock button to lock
the doors while any door is open does not
sound the horn.
l
If the transmitter does not operate when
pressing a button or the operation range
becomes too small, the battery may be
dead. To install a new battery, refer to
Maintenance (page 3-26).
l
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash once
to indicate that both doors are locked.
l
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights only flash when
the theft deterrent system is armed.
both the doors are locked before the theft-
deterrent system is properly armed.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-71.
l
Additional transmitters can be obtained at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 3
transmitters can be used with the keyless
entry system per vehicle. Bring all
transmitters to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when additional transmitters are
required.
NOTE
qTransmitter
l
Both doors cannot be locked when the key
is in the ignition switch.
Confirm that both doors are locked visually
Lock button
l
or audibly by use of the double click.
Unlock button
Panic button
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button.
Operation
indicator light
To unlock both doors, press the unlock
button again within 3 seconds.
Trunk button
NOTE
The unlock button can be used to open the
power windows. Refer to Opening the Power
Windows from Outside (page 3-38).
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Turning on the alarm
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
indicate that both doors are unlocked.
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights only flash when the
theft deterrent system is turned off.
the theft deterrent system has been properly
turned off.
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the
following will occur:
l
The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights flash.
l
Turning off the alarm
Press any button on the transmitter.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-71.
qTransmitter Maintenance
NOTE
Auto re-lock function
After unlocking with the transmitter, both
doors will automatically lock if one of the
doors is not opened within about 30 seconds.
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not flash, the battery may be
dead.
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
Trunk button
To open the trunk, press the trunk button
for more than 1 second.
NOTE
l
(With power retractable hardtop)
The trunk lid can only be opened when the
power retractable hardtop is fully opened/
closed. Open/close the power retractable
hardtop completely before opening the
trunk lid.
l
The trunk button is disabled when the trunk
lid release lock-out button inside the trunk
is in the OFF position. Refer to Remote
Trunk Lid Release Lock-Out on page 3-34.
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, pressing the panic button will
activate the vehicle's alarm.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any door
or the trunk lid is open or closed.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Insert a screwdriver into the slot and
push the tab to remove the key from
the transmitter.
CAUTION
Ø Install the battery with the positive
pole ( ) facing down. Battery
leakage could occur if it is not
installed correctly.
Tab
Ø When replacing the battery, be
careful not to bend the electrical
terminals or get oil on them. Also
be careful not to get dirt in the
transmitter as it could be
damaged.
Ø There is the danger of explosion if
the battery is not correctly
replaced.
Ø Replace only with the same type
battery (CR1620 or equivalent).
Ø Dispose of used batteries
according to the following
instructions.
3. Insert a screwdriver into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter.
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
Never disassemble.
Never throw the battery into
fire and/or water.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Never deform or crush.
Replacing the transmitter battery
1. Unfold the key (page 3-23).
4. Remove the battery.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
5. Put in the new battery (CR1620 or
equivalent) with the positive pole (
facing down.
qService
)
If you have a problem with the keyless
entry system, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring
all remaining transmitters to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make
the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative.
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
6. Align the front and back covers and
snap the transmitter shut.
7. Align the key with the transmitter as
shown in the figure, and insert the key
until a click sound is heard.
CAUTION
Insert the key into the transmitter
securely until a click sound is heard.
If it is not inserted securely, it could
detach from the transmitter.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qDeclaration of Conformity
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qLocking, Unlocking with Key
Door Locks
Either door can be locked/unlocked with
the key.
Turn the key toward the front to unlock,
toward the back to lock.
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
Leaving a child or a pet unattended
in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In
hot weather, temperatures inside a
vehicle can become high enough to
cause brain damage or even death.
Unlock
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Lock
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
qLocking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (with Advanced Key)
Keep both doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall
out if a door is accidentally opened
and can more easily be thrown out in
an accident.
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the request switch while
carrying the advanced key outside the
vehicle, refer to Operations Using
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).
qLocking, Unlocking with
Always close all the windows, lock the
doors and take the key with you when
leaving your vehicle unattended:
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle
left unlocked becomes an easy target
for thieves and intruders.
Transmitter (with Advanced Key)
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-14).
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter
(with Retractable Type Key)
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-24).
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-
l
(With advanced key)
Lock Knob
The driver's door cannot be locked using
the door-lock knob from the outside.
(With retractable type key)
The driver's door cannot be locked using
the door-lock knob from the outside if the
key is in the ignition switch.
To lock any door from the inside, push the
door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it out.
This does not operate the other door
locks.
l
l
When locking the doors this way, be careful
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
qPower Door Locksí
Lock
Vehicle lock-out prevention
(With advanced key)
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle. Both doors will automatically
unlock if they are locked using the power
door locks with any door open.
Unlock
(With retractable type key)
To lock any door with the door-lock knob
from the outside, push the door-lock knob
to the lock position and close the door.
This does not operate the other door
locks.
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle. With the key in the ignition
switch, both doors will automatically
unlock if they are locked using the power
door locks with any door open.
Door-lock knob
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-31
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Locking, unlocking with key
Locking, unlocking with door-lock
switch
Both doors lock automatically when the
driver's door is locked with the key. Both
doors unlock when the driver's door is
unlocked and the key is held in the unlock
position for one second or longer.
Both doors lock automatically when
LOCK is pressed. They all unlock when
the unmarked part of the door-lock switch
is pressed.
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
NOTE
Locking, unlocking with request switch
(with advanced key)
Holding the key in the unlocked position in the
driver's door lock for about a second unlocks
both doors. To unlock only the driver's door,
insert the key into the driver's door lock and
turn the key briefly to the unlock position and
then immediately return it to the center
position.
Both doors can be locked/unlocked by
doors while carrying the advanced key
outside the vehicle, refer to Operations
Using Advanced Keyless Functions (page
3-7).
Locking, unlocking with transmitter
(with advanced key)
Both doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-14).
Locking, unlocking with transmitter
(with retractable type key)
Both doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-24).
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
q
Opening and Closing the Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
trunk:
WARNING
Close the trunk lid and do not allow
children to play inside the vehicle:
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in
possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
Allowing a person to ride in the trunk
is dangerous. In addition, the person
in the trunk could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden
braking or a collision.
Keep the trunk closed when driving:
Exhaust gas entering the cabin of a
vehicle through an open trunk is
dangerous. This gas contains CO
(carbon monoxide), which is
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by latching the
doors and the trunk, and keeping the
keys where children can not play with
them:
colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous. If inhaled, it can cause
loss of consciousness and death.
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars
or trunks can die very quickly from
heat prostration. Do not leave your
children or pets alone in a car at any
time. Do not leave the car or the
trunk unlocked.
Opening the trunk lid with the key
Insert the key into the slot and turn it
clockwise.
Open
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
CAUTION
(With power retractable hardtop)
The trunk lid can only be opened when the
power retractable hardtop is fully opened/
closed. Open/close the power retractable
hardtop completely before opening the trunk
lid.
Do not open the trunk while the
power retractable hardtop is
opening/closing. The power
retractable hardtop and trunk lid
mechanisms could be damaged.
Closing the trunk lid
Opening the trunk lid with the request
switch (with advanced key)
Use both hands to push the trunk lid down
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.
Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure it is
secure.
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the request switch on the trunk lid while
carrying the advanced key outside the
vehicle, refer to Operations Using
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).
q
Remote Trunk Lid Release Lock-Out
Opening the trunk lid with the
transmitter (with advanced key)
The remote release may be canceled using
the trunk lid release lock-out button to
prevent anyone in the vehicle from
opening the trunk.
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-14).
NOTE
You cannot prevent another person from
getting access to your trunk if you give the
person your key.
Opening the trunk lid with the
transmitter (with retractable type key)
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-24).
The switch is mounted inside the trunk.
OFF position
Opening the trunk lid with the remote
release button
Push the release button.
ON position
With advanced key
With the switch in the ON position, the
remote trunk lid release button can be
operated.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
With the switch in the OFF position, the
remote release button cannot be operated.
Inside Trunk Release Lever
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside
trunk release lever that provides a means
of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the
trunk.
To open the trunk lid when the switch is
in the OFF position, do one of the
following:
l
Press the request switch on the trunk
lid.
l
Press the trunk button on the
No matter how careful adults might be
with keys and locking their cars, parents
should be aware that children may be
tempted to play around vehicles and use
the trunk as a hiding place.
transmitter.
Open the trunk with the auxiliary key.
l
Without advanced key
With the switch in the ON position, the
remote trunk lid release button and the
trunk button on the transmitter can be
operated.
Adults are advised to familiarize
themselves with the operation and
location of the inside trunk release lever
so that all children can be told about it in
an appropriate way, keeping in mind that
most vehicles do not have such levers.
With the switch in the OFF position, the
remote release button or the trunk button
on the transmitter cannot be operated.
To open the trunk lid when the switch is
in the OFF position, open the trunk with
the key.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qOpening the Trunk Lid from the
WARNING
Inside
Close the trunk lid and do not allow
children to play inside the vehicle:
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in
possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the
direction of the arrow. The lever is made
of material that will glow for hours in the
darkness of the trunk following a brief
exposure to ambient light.
The inside trunk release lever is located
on the inside of the trunk end trim.
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by latching the
doors and the trunk, and keeping the
keys where children can not play with
them:
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars
or trunks can die very quickly from
heat prostration. Do not leave your
children or pets alone in a car at any
time. Do not leave the car or the
trunk unlocked.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qOperating the Power Windows
Power Windows
(Type A)
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for the power windows to
operate.
Manual opening/closing
To open the window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person's hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury
or even death.
Close
Open
Passenger's
window
This warning applies especially to
children.
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Driver's window
Auto-opening
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch completely down.
To stop the window partway, lightly pull
up the switch and then release it.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qOperating the Driver's Side
qOperating the Passenger Power
Power Window (Type B)
Window (Type B)
Manual opening/closing
To open the window to the desired
position, hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, pull up the switch.
To open the window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
Close
Open
Close
Open
Passenger's window
Driver's window
qOpening the Power Windows
from Outsideí
Auto-opening
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch completely down.
Both power windows can be opened from
outside the vehicle after the doors are
closed.
To stop the window partway, lightly pull
up the switch and then release it.
NOTE
The power windows cannot be opened from
outside the vehicle under the following
condition:
l
A door or the trunk lid is opened.
l
The key is inserted into the ignition switch.
l
(With advanced key)
The start knob is in any position except
Lock.
3-38
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Opening
Advanced key
Because nobody likes getting into a very
hot car, we have introduced a way to get a
head start on cooling it, even before you
put your seat belts on and insert your key
in the ignition. If you see the vehicle is in
a secure area, you can open the both
windows as you approach the vehicle to
get the air moving before you even step
into the hot vehicle.
Lock button
Unlock button
Trunk button
Panic button
WARNING
Use the auto-window function only
when you can see the vehicle and it is
in a secure area:
Retractable type key
Do not let children play with your
keys. If they open the window
without your knowing, the open
windows are an even bigger
invitation to a thief than leaving the
doors unlocked.
Lock button
Unlock button
Panic button
The windows can be opened for
ventilating the cabin before getting in the
vehicle.
Trunk button
Press once, then press again within 1.5
seconds and hold the unlock button on the
transmitter.
After the doors are unlocked, both
windows open while the unlock button is
pressed.
To stop the windows while opening,
release the button.
If the operation is performed from the
beginning again, the windows open.
NOTE
The unlock button does not operate unless it is
pressed twice sequentially.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qFuel-Filler Lid
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
The remote fuel-filler lid release is
mounted in the seat side box.
To open the seat side box, unlock it and
pull the release catch.
WARNING
When removing the fuel-filler cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for any
hissing to stop. Then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel
tank and the fuel-filler cap is
removed too quickly.
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and flames away
from the filler neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel-
filler cap or not using a fuel-filler cap
may result in fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
To open the fuel-filler lid, pull on the
remote fuel-filler lid release.
CAUTION
Always use only a genuine Mazda
fuel-filler cap or an approved
equivalent, available at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The wrong
cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel and emission
control systems. It may also cause
the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qFuel-Filler Cap
The removed cap can be attached to the inner
side of the lid during refueling to prevent fuel
on the cap from dripping onto the vehicle.
To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
To close the fuel-filler cap, turn it
clockwise until two or more click sounds
are heard.
Close
Open
CAUTION
Make sure the fuel-filler cap is
tightened securely. The check engine
light may illuminate when the cap is
not tightened securely. If the light
remains on (even after you have
tightened the cap securely, driven,
and restarted the engine several
times), it may indicate a different
problem. Contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded
area and secure it in the stay hole
indicated by the arrow to hold the hood
open.
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
A hood that is not closed and
securely locked is dangerous as it
could fly open while the vehicle is
moving and block the driver's vision
which could result in a serious
accident.
Clip
qOpening the Hood
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
Support rod
qClosing the Hood
WARNING
Do not leave items in the engine
compartment:
After you have finished checking or
doing servicing in the engine
compartment, do not forget and
leave items such as tools or rags in
the engine compartment.
Release handle
Tools or other items left in the engine
compartment could cause engine
damage or a fire leading to an
unexpected accident.
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening
and slide the hood latch lever to the
right and lift the hood.
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all filler caps are in place and
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil
containers, etc.) have been removed.
2. Insert the support rod in its clip while
holding up the hood. Verify that the
support rod is secured in the clip before
closing the hood.
3. Close the hood so that it locks securely.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Convertible Top (Soft Top)í
Windshield header
Top latch assembly
Top storage area
Convertible
top's handles
Label (The label indicates the position where convertible
top is to be held when lowering or raising it.)
Always keep your hands and fingers
away from the fastening mechanisms
when moving the convertible top:
It is dangerous to place your hands
or fingers near the fastening
qConvertible Top Precautions
WARNING
Sit in the seat with the seat belt
correctly fastened when the vehicle is
moving:
mechanisms. Your hands or fingers
could be caught and injured by the
mechanism.
Standing in the vehicle, or sitting on
the convertible top storage area or
center console when the vehicle is
moving is a dangerous way to ride.
During a sudden maneuver or
collision you could be seriously
injured or even killed.
CAUTION
Remove leaves or other matter that
may accumulate on and around the
soft top. Otherwise, the water
drainage outlets could become
blocked, resulting in water leakage.
For detailed maintenance of the
water draining outlets, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-43
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
l
Before lowering or raising the
qLowering the Convertible Top
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Fully open the left and right windows.
3. Turn off the engine.
convertible top, stop in a safe place off
the right-of-way and park on a level
surface.
l
Make sure nothing is on the convertible
top or near the back window when
raising or lowering the convertible top.
Even small objects may interfere and
cause damage.
4. Make sure there are no objects which
have been placed in the area where the
convertible top is to be retracted.
l
When lowering the convertible top,
make sure objects inside the vehicle are
not blown away by the wind.
Secure all loose objects inside before
driving with the convertible top down.
To help prevent burglary or vandalism
and to ensure that the passenger
compartment stays dry, close the
convertible top securely and lock both
doors when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or sharp objects in
the convertible top storage area:
Putting heavy or sharp objects in the
convertible top storage area is
dangerous.
l
l
During a sudden stop or collision,
they can become projectiles that
might hit and injure passengers.
l
Do not drive through an automatic car
wash; it may damage the convertible
top.
Do not raise or lower the convertible
top when the temperature is below 5 °C
(41 °F) ; this will damage the
convertible top material.
5. Pull the top latch outward by pressing
the lock release button to detach the
lock. Make sure the lock is detached.
l
l
Do not lower the convertible top when
it's wet. If the convertible top dries
while folded, it will deteriorate and
shrink.
Lock release button
Top latch
l
Lowering the convertible top while it's
wet can also cause water to drip into
the passenger compartment.
Do not raise or lower the convertible
l
top in a strong wind as it could damage
the convertible top or cause an
unexpected accident.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
6. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold
the convertible top along the center
edge and pull it toward the vehicle rear.
7. Continue to move the convertible top
rearward while pressing the rear glass
lightly with your hand.
Center edge
NOTE
8. After the convertible top has been
folded down, press the back end of the
folded down convertible top until a
click sound is heard, then the front end.
Lightly rock the retracted convertible
top to make sure it is securely locked.
To lower the convertible top from inside the
vehicle, use the convertible top's handles.
Convertible top's
handles
9. Raise the windblocker if it is needed.
NOTE
The windblocker reduces the amount of wind
coming into the cabin from behind when
driving with the convertible top opened.
Refer to Windblocker on page 6-84.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qRaising the Convertible Top
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Fully open the left and right windows.
3. Turn off the engine.
To raise the convertible top from inside the
vehicle, use the convertible top's handles.
4. Pull the unlock lever outward to
disengage the lock.
Unlock lever
Convertible top's
handles
6. Sitting in a seat, grasp the convertible
top's handles, and press the convertible
top against the windshield.
Move the top latch slowly to make sure
the anchor engages with the striker,
then rotate the top latch to the lock
position until a click sound is heard.
5. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold
the convertible top along the center
edge and pull it towards the vehicle
front.
Convertible top's
handles
Center edge
Striker
Anchor
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
7. Connect the rear window defroster
coupler if it has been disconnected.
CAUTION
Driving with the convertible top not
fully locked could damage the
convertible top.
If the red indicator is visible on the
lock release button, the convertible
top is not locked. After locking the
convertible top, verify that the red
indicator is not visible.
Locked position
NOTE
If the coupler was not plugged in the rear
Unlocked position
Red indicator
window defroster would not work.
qTaking Care of the Top
Refer to Convertible Top Maintenance
(page 8-52) for information on taking care
of the convertible top.
NOTE
l
The convertible top may be constricted if it
is left retracted for a long period.
Therefore, if the top has become
constricted, it may be difficult to hook the
top latch striker to the anchor.
l
Make sure the convertible top is securely
locked by pushing up on it. If it still sounds
loose (rattles) after being locked by the top
latch, have it inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Convertible Top (Power Retractable Hardtop)í
The power retractable hardtop opens/closes electrically by operating switches in the
vehicle. When opening/closing the hardtop, the hardtop, deck and window glass operate
together. The hardtop is stored in the storage area under the deck.
Close switch
Open switch
Indicator light
Top latch assembly
Hardtop
Deck
3-48
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qPower Retractable Hardtop Precautions
WARNING
Always confirm that there are no people around the vehicle before operating the
hardtop:
If the hardtop were to operate unexpectedly, it could result in an accident and
serious injury from someone getting caught in the mechanism.
Always drive safely and observe the speed limit:
Rollover accidents on a hardtop vehicle are dangerous. The hardtop is not as strong
as a regular steel roof. Rollover accidents could dislodge or crush the hardtop and
cause serious injuries or even death, just as with no top.
Sit in the seat with the seat belt correctly fastened when the vehicle is moving:
Standing in the vehicle, or sitting on the deck or center console when the vehicle is
moving is a dangerous way to ride. During a sudden maneuver or collision you could
be seriously injured or even killed.
Always keep your hands and fingers away from the fastening mechanisms when
moving the hardtop:
It is dangerous to place your hands or fingers near the fastening mechanisms. Your
hands or fingers could be caught and injured by the mechanism.
CAUTION
Ø Do not drive with the hardtop partially opened; this could damage the hardtop or
cause an unexpected accident.
Ø Children should not be allowed to play with the open/close switch.
Ø Do not place objects or cargo around the deck, rear glass, or the hardtop storage
area.
Even small objects may interfere and cause damage.
Ø Remove leaves that accumulate on and around the hardtop. If the leaves are not
removed, they may block the water drainage outlets.
Ø Before opening the hardtop, make sure the rear window defogger switch
(Defroster) is turned off. Otherwise the heat generated from the defogger could
damage the hardtop and the internal material.
Ø When opening/closing the hardtop, verify that there is no obstruction above the
hardtop (about 1.5 m from the ground) so as not to damage the hardtop or the
obstruction.
Ø When opening/closing the hardtop, do not apply any load to the hardtop or the
deck. The opening/closing mechanism of the hardtop may be damaged.
l
Open/close the hardtop with the vehicle parked on level ground in a safe place where the
vehicle does not obstruct traffic. If the hardtop is opened/closed on a slope or bump, the
opening/closing mechanism of the hardtop may be damaged.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
l
Before opening or closing the hardtop, stop in a safe place off the right-of-way and park
on a level surface.
l
When opening the hardtop, make sure objects inside the vehicle are not blown away by
the wind.
l
Secure all loose objects inside before driving with the hardtop down.
To help prevent burglary or vandalism and to ensure that the passenger compartment
l
stays dry, close the hardtop securely and lock both doors when leaving the vehicle.
Do not drive through an automatic car wash as it may damage the hardtop.
Do not open or close the hardtop forcefully when the ambient temperature is low and the
l
l
hardtop or the surrounding area is frozen as it could damage the hardtop.
Opening the hardtop while it is wet can also cause water to drip into the passenger
l
compartment.
l
Do not open or close the hardtop in a strong wind as it could damage the hardtop.
qOperation Indicator Light
qOperation Conditions
If the following conditions have been
satisfied, the hardtop can be opened/
closed.
l
The vehicle is parked on a level surface
off the right-of-way and the parking
brake is firmly set.
The ignition switch is in the ON
l
When illuminated
position.
Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P) or Neutral (N),
a manual transmission in Neutral.
The trunk lid is closed.
l
This notifies the driver that the hardtop is
only partially open.
l
When flashing
This indicates that the hardtop is being
open/closed. (During button operation)
NOTE
If the power retractable hardtop cannot be
closed even after the operation conditions are
all met, have it checked at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
The hardtop can be closed manually as an
emergency measure.
When not illuminated
This indicates that the hardtop is open/
closed fully.
NOTE
Refer to The Power Retractable Hardtop Does
not Close on page 3-54.
If the operation indicator light flashes quickly,
there may be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
7. Press and hold the open button until the
hardtop opens completely.
qOpening the Power Retractable
Hardtop
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Neutral.
3. Apply the parking brake with the brake
pedal depressed.
4. Start the Engine.
NOTE
Do not open/close the hardtop with the engine
stopped. Otherwise the vehicle's battery power
could be depleted.
NOTE
l
When the open switch is pressed, a beep
sound is heard.
l
The hardtop keeps opening and the
operation indicator light flashes while the
open switch is pressed.
5. With the lock release button depressed,
pull the top latch outward to unlock.
l
If the switch is released while the hardtop is
opening, the hardtop stops opening. If the
switch is pressed again, the hardtop
resumes opening.
Lock release button
Top latch
8. The deck opens.
6. Verify that the operation indicator light
is illuminated and the lock is detached.
NOTE
If the windows are closed, the windows
automatically open partially when the deck
opens.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
9. The hardtop opens.
qClosing the Power Retractable
Hardtop
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Neutral.
3. Apply the parking brake with the brake
pedal depressed.
4. Start the Engine.
NOTE
10. The hardtop retracts under the deck.
Do not open/close the hardtop with the engine
stopped. Otherwise the vehicle's battery power
could be depleted.
5. Press and hold the close button until
the hardtop closes completely.
11. The deck closes.
NOTE
l
When the close switch is pressed, a beep
sound is heard.
l
The hardtop keeps closing and the
operation indicator light flashes while the
close switch is pressed.
l
If the switch is released while the hardtop is
closing, the hardtop stops closing. If the
switch is pressed again, the hardtop
resumes closing.
NOTE
When the operation is finished, a beep sound is
heard and the operation indicator light turns
off.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
6. The deck opens.
8. The hardtop closes.
NOTE
9. The deck closes.
If the windows are closed, the windows
automatically open partially when the deck
opens.
7. The hardtop comes out from under the
deck.
NOTE
l
When the operation is finished, a beep
sound is heard and the operation indicator
light illuminates.
l
The power windows cannot be closed
automatically.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
10. Move the top latch slowly to make
sure the anchor engages with the
striker, then rotate the top latch to the
lock position until a click sound is
heard.
NOTE
l
The operation indicator light turns off when
the top latch hook is locked.
l
If the hardtop is not closed properly even
with the top latch locked, contact Mazda to
have it inspected.
Striker
qThe Power Retractable Hardtop
Does not Close
If the hardtop cannot be closed electrically
power retractable hardtop operation
conditions first.
Refer to Operation Conditions on page
3-50.
Anchor
If the power retractable hardtop cannot be
closed even after the operation conditions
are all met, have it checked at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If you are unable to have the hardtop
checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer,
the hardtop can be closed manually as an
emergency measure.
CAUTION
Driving with the hardtop not fully
locked could damage the hardtop.
If the red indicator is visible on the
lock release button, the hardtop is
not locked. After locking the hardtop,
verify that the red indicator is not
visible.
The procedure for manually closing the
hardtop is as follows:
1. Release the locks of the deck and open
it. (Refer to Opening the deck)
Locked position
2. Lift up the hardtop and close it. (Refer
to Closing the hardtop)
3. Tie the ropes to the deck links and
close the deck. (Refer to Closing the
deck)
Unlocked position
Red indicator
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
WARNING
CAUTION
Verify that the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position before manually
operating the hardtop:
Ø Do not drive the vehicle with the
hardtop open halfway.
Ø Do not perform the procedure in a
strong wind as it could cause an
unexpected accident.
Ø Two adults are required to
perform the procedure, especially
when lifting up the hardtop. Do
not do it alone so as not to cause
injury or vehicle damage.
Manually retracting the hardtop with
the ignition switch not in the LOCK
position is dangerous as the retractor
motors could turn on suddenly and
cause injury resulting from hands or
fingers being pinched in the
mechanism.
Ø Some steps in the procedure
require using multiple tools at the
same time and a certain level of
technical expertise. In addition,
holding your body extended over
the car can result in muscle strains
so Mazda recommends having the
hardtop checked at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Manual closing
Tool preparation
Locate the following tools in the glove
box.
Refer to Tool Storage on page 7-5.
Allen wrench
Eyebolt
NOTE
Rope
Use a suitable means of illumination, such as a
flashlight, to improve visibility under the deck
lid when performing this task.
Before closing manually
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Reverse (R) or 1, and
turn off the engine.
Opening the deck
1. Remove the antenna if it is installed.
Refer to Detachable Type on page
6-15.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position while depressing the brake
pedal.
CAUTION
Do the procedure with the antenna
removed. The antenna may be
damaged if it is left installed.
4. Turn on the hazard warning flasher if it
is needed.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
3. Use the eyebolt to get enough torque
on the short leg of the Allen wrench
and turn the Allen wrench 4 times
counterclockwise.
l
The gear units on both sides have to be
unlocked to release the deck before it is
raised manually. Because the deck is heavy,
two adults are required to raise it.
l
The following describes the procedure for
the gear unit on one side. Perform the
procedure on both sides.
2. Insert the Allen wrench into the Allen
socket in the bolt head that is pointed
forward of the gear unit located under
the deck lid as shown in the figure.
Allen wrench
Eyebolt
Deck
Gear unit
4. Disconnect the eyebolt from the Allen
wrench leaving the Allen wrench in
place, and insert the threaded end of
the eyebolt in the hole directly above
the Allen socket and tighten it
Bolt
clockwise two full turns.
Allen wrench
Thread hole
Eyebolt
NOTE
The gear units are located underneath the
deck.
Bolt
Bolt
NOTE
Tighten the eyebolt with the Allen wrench
inserted. The Allen wrench can serve as a
reference for inserting the eyebolt more easily.
5. Remove the bolt, which is loosened
using the Allen wrench, by turning it
counterclockwise.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
9. Press the eyebolt against the sector
gear.
l
After the bolt is clear of the hole, keep the
Allen wrench level while pulling it out with
the bolt attached so as to prevent the bolt
from hitting the vehicle and dropping.
Bring the removed bolt to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer. If you drop the bolt in the
vehicle by mistake, inform at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Eyebolt
Sector gear
Guide
l
6. Tighten the eyebolt by turning it
clockwise 5 more times.
Eyebolt
10. Press and rotate the sector gear
rearward to release the lock.
Eyebolt
Sector gear
Guide
7. Unscrew the eyebolt now by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Insert the threaded end of the eyebolt
through the guide.
CAUTION
When releasing the sector gear lock
using the eyebolt, make sure the
eyebolt remains centered as you push
it against the sector gear lock. If the
eyebolt slips it could cause your hand
to veer and hit the vehicle resulting in
minor scrapes or bruises.
Guide
11. Pull out the eyebolt from the guide
when the lock is released.
Eyebolt
12. Do the same procedure on the other
side.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
13. Lift up the deck using two adults, one
on each side of the vehicle, and open
the deck completely.
Closing the hardtop
CAUTION
Ø The procedure should be done by
at least two adults. Do not do it
alone so as not to cause injury or
vehicle damage.
Ø Some steps in the procedure
require holding your body in a
strained position for extended
periods and if over exerted it could
result in injury.
Ø Be very careful when closing the
hardtop to prevent pinching and
possible injury.
CAUTION
1. Grasp the hardtop along the side and
front surfaces and lift it up enough to
create a clearance at the rear of
hardtop.
Ø Lift the deck using two adults.
Doing it alone could result in
injury or the deck lid mechanism
being twisted which could damage
it.
Ø Do not let go of the deck lid on
both sides until it is fully open. The
deck lid could fall if it is released
too soon and cause injury.
Ø Do not attempt to forcefully lift the
deck. If the lock has not detached
and the deck is forcefully lifted, it
could damage the deck.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Grasp the hardtop along the side and
rear surfaces and lift it up enough to
create a clearance behind the rear glass.
Closing the deck
1. Loop the center of the rope through the
pin on the link twice so that it does not
loosen.
Pin
Link
Rope
3. Grasp the hardtop along its side surface
and the rear area of the rear glass, pull
the hardtop towards the front of the
vehicle, and completely close it.
NOTE
Before closing the deck, two small ropes need
to be installed and tied into the trunk so that
the deck does not pop up while driving, and so
that the deck can be raised for servicing by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
2. Route one end of the rope to the inside
of the vehicle passing it through the
gap in the trim. Route the other end to
the outside of the vehicle passing it
through the links.
To the inside of the vehicle
4. Lock the top latch.
Refer to Closing the Power Retractable
Hardtop on page 3-52.
Trim
Rope
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
To the outside of the vehicle
5. Lightly pushing the deck downward,
pull the ropes to the rear along both
sides of the trunk to hold the deck
down.
NOTE
Pull the ropes horizontally to the vehicle rear.
Rope
Links
Rope
NOTE
Always route the one end of the rope to inside
of the vehicle. If it is not inside the vehicle, it
will be difficult to service the hardtop at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3. Do the same procedure on the other
side.
6. Lightly move the deck and verify that
it is secured completely.
4. Close the deck uniformly on both sides
using two adults, one on each side of
the vehicle.
7. Open the trunk using the key, and tie
the rope to the bracket and knot it twice
so that it does not loosen.
Rope
Bracket
CAUTION
CAUTION
Tie the ropes securely so that the
deck does not open while the vehicle
is being driven.
Close the deck using two adults.
Doing it alone could result in injury
or the deck lid mechanism being
twisted which could damage it.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Open the trunk using the key. The remote
release button, advanced keyless entry
function, and the keyless entry system do not
operate when this emergency procedure is
done.
8. Tie off the other side rope the same
way.
9. Close the trunk lid.
After finishing the procedure
After finishing the procedure, have the
hardtop checked at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 40 km/h
(25 mph) or lower before having the
hardtop checked at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer:
The hardtop may open while the
vehicle is being driven and cause an
accident.
NOTE
The trunk cannot be opened with the remote
release button, advanced keyless entry
function, and the keyless entry system as they
are disabled when this emergency procedure is
done.
Appearance Care
Refer to Hardtop Maintenance (page
8-53) for information on retractable
hardtop appearance care.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qWhen Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated
If an improper operation is performed or a system malfunction has occurred, the indicator light or a warning beep
is activated to notify the user of improper operation or a system malfunction.
Warning
What to check
Make sure that all the conditions for operating the
retractable hardtop have been met. If the chime sounds
despite having met all the operation conditions, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the system
inspected.
A warning beep sound is heard when the open or close
switch is pressed.
A warning beep sound is heard when the open or close The hardtop is not fully opened or closed. Press the
switch is released.
switch until the open or close operation is completed.
The hardtop has not completely opened or closed.
Continue to press the button until the operation is
A warning beep sound is heard continuously and the
indicator light is illuminated while the vehicle is driven. completed. After the hardtop is completely closed, latch
the top latch.
If the open or close button has not been operated and
the operation indicator light is flashing:
The system may have a malfunction. Have the vehicle
checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Immobilizer System (with
Advanced Key)
CAUTION
Do not allow the following when
starting the engine with the auxiliary
key due to an advanced key dead
battery or other malfunction.
Otherwise the signal from the
auxiliary key will not be received
correctly and the engine may not
start.
The immobilizer system allows the engine
to start only with an advanced key the
system recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized advanced key, the
engine will not start, thereby helping to
prevent the theft of your vehicle.
If you have a problem with the
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.
immobilizer system or the advanced key
(including auxiliary key), consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Ø Radio equipment like this is
governed by laws in the United
States.
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the key grip.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do
not:
Ø Spare auxiliary keys or keys for
other vehicles equipped with an
immobilizer system touch or come
near the auxiliary key.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Ø
Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage which touch or
come near the key.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
l
The advanced keys (including auxiliary key)
carry a unique electronic code. For this
reason, and to assure your safety, obtaining
a replacement advanced key (including
auxiliary key) requires some waiting time.
They are only available through an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
Always keep a spare advanced key in case
one is lost. If an advanced key is lost,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
l
If you lose an advanced key (including
auxiliary key), an Authorized Mazda Dealer
will reset the electronic codes of your
remaining advanced keys (including
auxiliary keys) and immobilizer system.
Bring all the remaining advanced keys
(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not
been reset is not possible.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Declaration of Conformity
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
l
qOperation
The engine may not start and the security
Arming
indicator light may illuminate or flash if the
advanced key is placed in an area where it
is difficult for the system to detect the
signal, such as on the dashboard, or in the
glove box. Move the advanced key to
another place, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, and then restart the
engine.
The system is armed when the ignition
switch is turned from the ON position to
the ACC or LOCK position. The security
indicator light in the instrument cluster
flashes every 2 seconds until the system is
disarmed.
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from
a transceiver or a mobile telephone could
interfere with your immobilizer system. If
you are using the proper advanced key and
the engine fails to start, check the security
indicator light. If the indicator light is
flashing, turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or LOCK position and wait for a
while, then restart the engine. If it does not
start after 3 or more tries, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the registered advanced key.
The security indicator light illuminates for
about 3 seconds and goes out.
l
If the security indicator light flashes
continuously while you are driving, do not
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If the
engine is shut off while the indicator light is
flashing, you will not be able to restart it.
Since the electronic codes are reset when
repairing the immobilizer system, the
advanced key (including auxiliary key) are
needed. Bring all the advanced keys
(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If the engine does not start with the
correct advanced key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating or
flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
qModification and Add-On
Immobilizer System
Equipment
(without Advanced Key)
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
system's operation if the system has been
modified or if any add-on equipment has
been installed.
The immobilizer system allows the engine
to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
CAUTION
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine will
not start, thereby helping to prevent the
theft of your vehicle.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
system or the vehicle.
CAUTION
Ø Radio equipment like this is
governed by laws in the United
States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do
not:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
CAUTION
l
The keys carry a unique electronic code.
For this reason, and to assure your safety,
obtaining a replacement key requires some
waiting time. They are only available
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Always keep a spare key, in case one is lost.
If a key is lost, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
When starting the engine do not
allow the following, as the engine
may not start due to the electronic
signal from the ignition key not being
transmitted correctly.
l
l
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not
been reset is not possible.
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the key grip.
Ø Spare keys or keys for other
vehicles equipped with an
immobilizer system touch or come
near the key grip.
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage which touch or
come near the key.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Declaration of Conformity
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
l
qOperation
If the security indicator light illuminates
Arming
and stays on or flashes when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, the
engine will not start.
The system is armed when the ignition
switch is turned from the ON to the ACC
or LOCK position.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes every two
seconds until the system is disarmed.
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from
a transceiver or a mobile telephone, could
interfere with your immobilizer system. If
you are using the proper key and your
engine fails to start, check the security
indicator light. If it is flashing, remove the
ignition key and wait 2 seconds or more,
then reinsert it and try starting the engine
again. If it does not start after 3 or more
tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the security indicator light flashes
continuously while you are driving, do not
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If you
shut off the engine while the light is
l
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the correct ignition key.
The security indicator light illuminates for
about three seconds and goes out.
flashing you will not be able to restart it.
Since the electronic codes are reset when
repairing the immobilizer system, the keys
are needed. Bring all the existing keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
If the engine does not start with the
correct ignition key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating or
flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
qModification and Add-On
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
system's operation if the system has been
modified or if any add-on equipment has
been installed.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
system or the vehicle.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
l
Opening the trunk lid by operating the
trunk lid release button.
Theft-Deterrent Systemí
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until a door is
unlocked or the trunk lid is opened with
the key or with the transmitter.
(With advanced key)
The lights and horn can also be
deactivated by pressing the request
switch.
If the theft deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle, which
could result in the vehicle or its contents
being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard
warning lights.
Refer to Operation on page 3-71.
NOTE
NOTE
If the battery goes dead while the theft-
deterrent system is armed, the horn will
activate and the hazard warning lights will
flash when the battery is charged or replaced.
l
The theft-deterrent system operates with the
key or the keyless entry system transmitter.
(With advanced key)
The theft-deterrent system can also be
operated using the advanced keyless
function.
l
qHow to Arm the System
The system operates only when the driver is
in the vehicle or within operational range
while the advanced key is being carried.
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
(With advanced key)
Turn the start knob to the LOCK
position.
l
The system will not function unless it is
properly armed. To properly secure the
vehicle, always make sure both windows
are completely closed and both doors and
the trunk lid are locked before leaving the
vehicle. Remember to take your key and
transmitter.
2. Make sure the hood and the trunk lid
are closed. Close and lock both doors
from the outside using the key. If you
have the keyless entry system, press
the lock button on the transmitter.
The hazard warning lights will flash
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
qOperation
System triggering conditions
(With advanced key)
Press a request switch on the doors or
the lock button on the transmitter.
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights flash for about 25
seconds when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
(Without advanced key)
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Close the hood and the trunk lid . Press
the area on the door-lock switch
marked “LOCK” once. Close both
doors.
l
Forcing open a door, the hood or the
trunk lid.
Unlocking a door with the door lock
l
switch.
l
Opening a door by operating an inside
door-lock knob.
Opening the hood by operating the
l
hood release handle.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-71
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
NOTE
Locking the doors with the inside door-lock
knob will not arm the system.
If you have any problem with the theft-
deterrent system, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
qTo Turn off an Armed System
qTheft-Deterrent Labels
An armed system can be turned off by any
one of the following methods:
l
Unlock a door with the key.
Press the unlock button on the keyless
l
entry system transmitter.
Insert the key into the ignition switch
l
and turn it to the ON position.
l
(With advanced key)
l
Press a request switch on the doors
or the unlock button on the
transmitter.
Turn the start knob to the ON
l
position.
A label indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is
in the glove compartment.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice
to indicate that the system is turned off.
NOTE
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the
lower rear corner of a front door window.
The trunk lid can be opened with the key or the
transmitter even when the system is armed. The
alarm will not come on and the system will
remain armed.
qTo Stop an Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off by
any one of the following methods:
l
Unlock a door with the key.
Open the trunk lid with the key.
Press the unlock button or press and
l
l
hold the trunk button on the keyless
entry system transmitter.
l
(With advanced key)
l
Press a request switch on the doors.
Press the unlock button or press and
l
hold the trunk button on the
transmitter.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
Steering Wheel
WARNING
Mirrors
qOutside Mirrors
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Check the mirror angles before driving.
Mirror type
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control
or an accident.
Flat type (driver's side)
Flat surface mirror.
Convex type (passenger side)
The mirror has single curvature on its
surface.
WARNING
qTilt Steering Wheel
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
To change the angle of the steering wheel,
stop the vehicle, pull the tilt wheel release
lever under the steering column down,
adjust the wheel, then push the release
lever up to lock the column.
Changing lanes without taking into
account the actual distance of the
vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
Tilt wheel release
lever
Power mirror
The ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON position.
To adjust:
1. Press the left or right side of the
selector switch to choose the left or
right side mirror.
After adjusting, push the wheel up and
down to be certain it's locked before
driving.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
2. Depress the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
qRearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Selector switch
Outside mirror
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror,
which might cause you to hit another
car when changing lanes.
Mirror switch
Rearview mirror adjustment
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
After adjusting the mirror, lock the control
by placing the selector switch in the
middle position.
Manual day/night mirror
Folding the mirror
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is
flush with the vehicle.
Auto-dimming mirror
WARNING
Always return the outside mirrors to
the driving position before you start
driving:
Driving with the outside mirrors
folded in is dangerous. Your rear view
will be restricted, and you could have
an accident.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
NOTE
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The
indicator light will turn off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON button ( ). The
indicator light will illuminate.
For the manual day/night mirror, perform the
adjustment with the day/night lever in the day
position.
Reducing glare from headlights
Manual day/night mirror
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from cars at the rear.
Day/Night lever
OFF button
ON button
Indicator light
Day
Night
Auto-dimming mirror
The auto-dimming mirror automatically
reduces glare of headlights from cars at
the rear when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
NOTE
l
Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects
on or around the light sensor. Otherwise,
light sensor sensitivity will be affected and
may not operate normally.
Light sensor
Light sensor
l
For information regarding the 3 buttons
(
,
,
) on the auto-dimming
mirror, refer to HomeLink Wireless Control
System (page 5-61).
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
4
Important information about driving your Mazda.
Fuel Requirements .................................................................... 4-2
Before Starting the Engine ........................................................... 4-5
Driving In Flooded Area ......................................................... 4-10
Towing ......................................................................................... 4-13
Trailer Towing ......................................................................... 4-13
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel
Octane Rating*(Anti-knock index)
Premium unleaded fuel
91 [ (R+M)/2 method] or above (96 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
You may use a regular unleaded fuel with an Octane Rating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON)
but this will slightly reduce performance, such as reduced engine output, and engine
knocking.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system
to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.
CAUTION
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead
to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10% ethanol
by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this
recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of
any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.
Ø Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those
specified by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10%. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name “Gasohol”.
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not
be covered by the Mazda warranty.
l
Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.
Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
l
l
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Emission Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything flammable:
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with
the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and
could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst
inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will
damage the converter and cause poor performance.
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Ø Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
Ø Do not coast with the ignition switch turned off.
Ø Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switch turned off.
Ø Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
Ø Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualified technician.
Ø Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before
the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification
made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
NOTE
While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard below the trunk,
however this does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a self-checking device and it
operates while the engine is off.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness
and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open
and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss
of consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed
and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which
contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or
even death could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,
before starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The
exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.
Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of
consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Before Starting the Engine
Before Getting In
After Getting In
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Be sure the windows, outside mirrors,
and outside lights are clean.
Inspect inflation pressures and
condition of tires.
Look under the vehicle for any sign of
fluid leaks.
Are all doors closed and locked?
Is the seat adjusted properly?
Are the inside and outside mirrors
adjusted?
Is the steering wheel adjusted properly?
Is each occupant's seat belt fastened?
Check all gauges.
Check all warning lights when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes off.
l
l
l
l
If you plan to back up, make sure
nothing is in your way.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake/clutch fluid,
washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be
inspected. See Maintenance, Section 8.
l
Always be thoroughly familiar with your
Mazda.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Break-In Period
Money-Saving Suggestions
No special break-in is necessary, but a few
precautions in the first 1,000 km (600
miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of your Mazda.
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save money on
fuel and repairs.
l
l
Do not race the engine.
Do not maintain one constant speed,
Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine
l
runs smoothly, begin driving.
Avoid fast starts.
Keep the engine tuned. Follow the
l
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle
l
l
maintenance schedule (page 8-3) and
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform inspections and servicing.
or high engine rpm for extended
periods of time.
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
l
l
Use the air conditioner only when
l
Avoid full-throttle starts.
necessary.
Slow down on rough roads.
Keep the tires properly inflated.
Do not carry unnecessary weight.
l
l
l
l
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Keep windows closed at high speeds.
Slow down when driving in crosswinds
l
l
l
and headwinds.
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going
down a hill:
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause
damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of
steering or braking control could
cause an accident.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
NOTE
Use snow chains only on the rear wheels.
Hazardous Driving
WARNING
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear while
driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
This could lead to loss of vehicle
control and an accident.
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
When driving on ice or in water, snow,
mud, sand, or similar hazard:
l
Be cautious and allow extra distance
for braking.
Avoid sudden braking and quick
l
steering.
l
If your vehicle is not equipped with
ABS, brake with the pedal by using a
light up-down motion. Do not hold the
pedal down constantly.
If your vehicle is equipped with ABS,
do not pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
l
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the rear
wheels.
For more traction in starting on
l
slippery surfaces such as ice or packed
snow, use sand, rock salt, chains,
carpeting, or other nonslip material
under the rear wheels.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Floor Mat
Rocking the Vehicle
WARNING
WARNING
Make sure the floor mats are hooked
on the retention pins to prevent them
from bunching up under the foot
pedals:
Do not spin the wheels at more than 56
km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
Using a floor mat that is not secured
is dangerous as it will interfere with
the accelerator and brake pedal
operation, which could result in an
accident.
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning
the wheels at high speed is
dangerous. The spinning tire could
overheat and explode. This could
cause serious injuries.
Do not install two floor mats, one on
top of the other, on the driver's side:
Installing two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side is
dangerous as the retention pins can
only keep one floor mat from sliding
forward.
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transmission failure,
and tire damage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the
accelerator slightly and slowly move the
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.
In using a heavy duty floor mat for
winter use always remove the
original floor mat.
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with
the foot pedal and could result in an
accident.
When setting a floor mat, position the
floor mat so that its eyelets are inserted
over the pointed end of the retention
posts.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
qSnow Tires
Winter Driving
Use snow tires on all four wheels
l
Carry emergency gear, including tire
chains, window scraper, flares, a small
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag
of sand or salt.
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. Inflate
snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)
more than recommended on the tire
pressure label (driver's door frame), but
never more than the maximum cold-tire
pressure shown on the tires.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to
perform the following precautions:
l
Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in
the radiator.
Your vehicle is originally equipped with
summer tires designed for optimum
traction on wet and dry roads. If your
vehicle is to be used on snow and ice
covered roads, Mazda recommends that
you replace the tires originally equipped
on your vehicle with snow tires during the
winter months.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 8-20.
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
Inspect the ignition system for damage
Use washer fluid made with
antifreeze―but do not use engine
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid
(page 8-23).
l
l
l
WARNING
l
Do not use the parking brake in
freezing weather as it may freeze.
Instead, shift to P with an automatic
transmission and to 1 or R with a
manual transmission. Block the rear
wheels.
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
Using tires different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly affected and result
in an accident.
l
Do not apply excessive force to a
window scraper when removing ice or
frozen snow on the mirror glass and
windshield.
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
l
Never use warm or hot water for
removing snow or ice from windows
and mirrors as it could result in the
glass cracking.
NOTE
pressure monitoring system, the system may
not function correctly when using tires with
steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls (page
5-32).
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
qTire Chains
Driving In Flooded Area
Check local regulations before using tire
chains.
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
CAUTION
Ø Chains may affect handling.
Ø Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer's
recommended limit, whichever is
lower.
Ø Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, and sharp turns.
Ø Avoid locked-wheel braking.
Ø Do not use chains on roads that
are free of snow or ice. The tires
and chains could be damaged.
Ø Chains may scratch or chip
aluminum wheels.
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded
roads as it could cause short
circuiting of electrical/electronic
parts, or engine damage or stalling
from water absorption. If the vehicle
has been immersed in water, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, the system may
not function correctly when using tire chains.
Install the chains on the rear tires.
Do not use chains on the front tires.
Please consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Installing the chains
1. Secure the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Always follow the
chain manufacturer's instructions.
2. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2
―1 km (1/4―1/2 mile).
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Overloading
WARNING
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of your load by weighing
the items (or people) before putting
them in the vehicle.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Driving on Uneven Road
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving under
the following conditions:
l
Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle
Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle
l
Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use
care and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
5
Explanation of instruments and controls.
Traction Control System (TCS)í ........................................... 5-24
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds ............................ 5-40
Switches and Controls ................................................................ 5-55
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............................................... 5-57
Rear Window Defroster ........................................................... 5-59
Horn ........................................................................................ 5-60
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................................... 5-60
HomeLink Wireless Control Systemí .................................... 5-61
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qIgnition Switch Positions
Ignition Switch
With advanced
key
Auxiliary key (with advanced key)
NOTE
When starting the engine using the advanced
key, refer to Starting the Engine (page 3-10).
When starting the engine with the
auxiliary key, perform the following
procedure.
Without advanced
key
1. Remove the auxiliary key from the
advanced key (page 3-18).
LOCK
2. Make sure the start knob is in LOCK
position.
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. Only in this position can the
key be removed.
3. Remove the start knob by pulling it
outward while pressing the buttons on
both the left and right sides.
Manual Transmission Vehicle
Push the key
4. Insert the auxiliary key in the ignition
switch.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Automatic Transmission Vehicle
WARNING
Remove the key only when the vehicle
is parked:
Removing the key from the ignition
switch while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. Removing the key allows
the steering wheel to lock. You will
lose steering control and a serious
accident could occur. (For vehicles
equipped with the advanced key, the
steering wheel locks when the starter
knob is turned to the LOCK position.)
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key or start knob to LOCK
position, set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transmission or in 1 or R
with a manual transmission:
It is important to place the key or
start knob in the LOCK position even
if you are not removing the key from
the ignition or leaving the vehicle.
Leaving the key in other positions
will disable some of the vehicle
security systems and run the battery
down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and shifting the shift lever to P with
an automatic transmission, or to 1 or
R with a manual transmission is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur. This could
cause an accident.
NOTE
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering
wheel from side to side.
Leaving the key or start knob in any position
but LOCK position also disables some of the
security features and may run the battery
down.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
ACC (Accessory)
Starting the Engine
The steering wheel unlocks and some
electrical accessories will operate.
NOTE
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark
ignition system.
ON
This system meets all Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Standard requirements
regulating the impulse electrical field strength
of radio noise.
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The warning lights
(except brakes) should be inspected
before the engine is started (page 5-40).
NOTE
1. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This
does not indicate an abnormality.
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
START
4. (Manual transmission)
Depress the clutch pedal all the way
and shift into neutral.
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while
cranking the engine.
(Automatic transmission)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning light can be checked after the
engine is started (page 5-40).
qIgnition Key Reminder
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position with the key inserted, a
continuous beep sound will be heard
when the driver's door is opened.
NOTE
(Manual transmission)
The starter will not operate unless the clutch is
depressed sufficiently.
(Automatic transmission)
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is
not in P or N.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position and hold (up to 10 seconds at
a time) until the engine starts.
CAUTION
Do not try the starter for more than
10 seconds at a time. If the engine
stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds
before trying again. Otherwise, you
may damage the starter and drain
the battery.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
6. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about 10 seconds.
Brake System
qFoot Brake
NOTE
l
In extremely cold weather or after the
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
vehicle has not been driven in several days,
let the engine warm up without operating
the accelerator.
l
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
should be started without use of the
accelerator.
If the engine does not start the first time,
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-20).
l
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qParking Brake
WARNING
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more effort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if you
pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key or start knob to LOCK
position, set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transmission or in 1 or R
with a manual transmission:
It is important to place the key or
start knob in the LOCK position even
if you are not removing the key from
the ignition or leaving the vehicle.
Leaving the key in other positions
will disable some of the vehicle
security systems and run the battery
down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and shifting the shift lever to P with
an automatic transmission, or to 1 or
R with a manual transmission is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur. This could
cause an accident.
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
Driving with your foot continuously
on the brake pedal or steadily
applying the brakes for long
distances is dangerous. This causes
overheated brakes, resulting in
longer stopping distances or even
total brake failure. This could cause
loss of vehicle control and a serious
accident. Avoid continuous
application of the brakes.
Dry brakes that have become wet by
driving very slowly and applying the
brakes lightly until brake performance
is normal:
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake on
will cause excessive wear of the brake
linings or pads.
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
NOTE
For parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving
(page 4-9) regarding parking brake use.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Setting the parking brake
qBrake System Warning Light
Depress the brake pedal and then firmly
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards
with sufficient force to hold the vehicle in
a stationary position.
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning
The light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It turns off
when the parking brake is fully released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the light stays on after the parking brake
is fully released, you may have a brake
problem.
Releasing the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and pull the
parking brake lever upwards, then press
the release button. While holding the
button, lower the parking brake lever all
the way down to the released position.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way.
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
depress or that it may go closer to the
floor. In either case, it will take longer to
stop the vehicle.
1. With the engine stopped, open the
hood and check the brake fluid level
immediately, and then add fluid if
required (page 8-22).
2. After adding fluid, check the light
again.
If the warning light remains on, or if the
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Even if the light turns off have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the
brake light is no longer illuminated.
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is
NOTE
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
l
Braking distances may be longer on loose
surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)
which usually have a hard foundation. A
vehicle with a normal braking system may
require less distance to stop under these
conditions because the tires will build up a
wedge of surface layer when the wheels
skid.
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
l
qAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The sound of the ABS operating may be
heard when starting the engine or
immediately after starting the vehicle.
However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one
is about to lock up, the ABS responds by
automatically releasing and reapplying
that wheel's brake.
qABS Warning Light
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal when the ABS operates. Continue
to depress the brake pedal without
pumping the brakes.
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated simultaneously is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
l
When the engine is jump-started to charge
the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs,
it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
l
(With DSC vehicles)
The brake assist system does not operate
while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
qBrake Assist (with DSC vehicles)
During emergency braking situations
when it is necessary to depress the brake
pedal with greater force, the brake assist
system provides braking assistance, thus
enhancing braking performance.
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply
more firmly.
NOTE
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may illuminate the brake
system warning light and the ABS
warning light on simultaneously. The
problem is likely to be the electronic
brake force distribution system.
l
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the pedal will feel
softer but the brakes will apply more firmly.
This is a normal effect of the brake assist
operation and does not indicate an
abnormality.
l
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, a motor/pump
operation noise may be heard. This is a
normal effect of the brake assist and does
not indicate an abnormality.
l
The brake assist equipment does not
supersede the functionality of the vehicle's
main braking system.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qBrake Pad Wear Indicator
Manual Transmission
Operation
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
q
Manual Transmission Shift Pattern
5-speed transmission
Neutral position
6-speed transmission
Neutral position
The vehicle is equipped with either a 5-
speed or 6-speed manual transmission.
The shift pattern for each is shown above.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
(5-speed transmission)
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A safety feature prevents accidental
shifting from 5 to R (reverse). The shift
lever must be put in neutral before being
shifted to R.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
(6-speed transmission)
CAUTION
Vehicles with 6-speed transmission are
equipped with a device to prevent shifting
to R (reverse) by mistake. Push the shift
lever downward and shift to R.
Ø Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
except when shifting gears. Also,
do not use the clutch to hold the
vehicle on an upgrade. Riding the
clutch will cause needless clutch
wear and damage.
Ø Do not apply any excessive lateral
force to the gear lever when
changing from 5th to 4th gear.
This could lead to the accidental
selection of 2nd gear, which can
result in damage to the
transmission.
Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to R.
Shifting to R while the vehicle is
still moving may damage the
transmission.
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high
speeds:
NOTE
If shifting to R is difficult, shift back into
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try
again.
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
qRecommendations for Shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration, we recommend
these shift points.
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R
position and set the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle unattended:
Otherwise the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
5-speed
transmission
6-speed
transmission
Gear
1 to 2
24 km/h (15 mph) 23 km/h (14 mph)
42 km/h (26 mph) 37 km/h (23 mph)
55 km/h (34 mph) 50 km/h (31 mph)
66 km/h (41 mph) 56 km/h (35 mph)
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
―
66 km/h (41 mph)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
For cruising
5-speed
Gear
6-speed
transmission
transmission
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
15 km/h (9 mph) 18 km/h (11 mph)
29 km/h (18 mph) 32 km/h (20 mph)
47 km/h (29 mph) 44 km/h (27 mph)
61 km/h (38 mph) 56 km/h (35 mph)
―
68 km/h (42 mph)
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
reduces the chance of stalling and gives
better acceleration when you need more
speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Automatic Transmission Controls
Various Lockouts:
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition
switch must be in the ACC or ON position).
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.
NOTE
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transmission giving the
driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transmission to shift gears. Even if
you intend to use the automatic transmission functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be
aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be
retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the
engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 5-15).
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTransmission Ranges
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
The shift lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move
suddenly, causing an accident or
serious injury.
P locks the transmission and prevents the
rear wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Only setting the shift lever to the P
position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is
dangerous. If P fails to hold, the
vehicle could move and cause an
accident.
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be
applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the
vehicle is moving can damage
your transmission.
Ø Shifting into a driving gear or
reverse when the engine is running
faster than idle can damage the
transmission.
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause
transmission damage.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the brake
pedal before moving the shift lever from N to
prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete stop
before shifting to or from R, except under
rare circumstances as explained in
Rocking the Vehicle (page 4-8).
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transmission will automatically
shift through a 6-gear sequence.
Temporary use of the direct mode is
possible.
N (Neutral)
Refer to Direct Mode on page 5-19.
In N, the wheels and transmission are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
M (Manual)
M is the manual shift mode position.
Gears can be shifted up or down by
operating the shift lever or steering shift
switches.
Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 5-15).
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qShift-Lock System
The shift-lock system prevents shifting
out of P unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift from P:
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the shift lever.
NOTE
To return to automatic shift mode, shift
the lever from M to D.
l
When the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.
NOTE
l
To be sure the vehicle is in park, the
If you change to manual shift mode when the
vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to M1.
ignition key cannot be removed unless the
shift lever is in P.
l
(With Advanced Key)
Indicators
The ignition switch cannot be turned from
the ACC to the LOCK position when the
shift lever is not in P.
Shift position indicator
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indicator in the instrument panel
illuminates.
qManual Shift Mode
This mode gives you the feel of driving a
manual transmission vehicle by operating
the shift lever and allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the rear wheels
much like a manual transmission when
more control is desired.
Gear position indicator
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
Shift position
indicator
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
NOTE
Changing to manual mode can be done while
driving the vehicle with no damage occurring
to the transmission.
Gear position
indicator
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
To shift up to a higher gear with the
steering shift switches, tap either of the
UP switches toward you once with your
fingers.
If the gears cannot be shifted down when
driving at higher speeds, the gear position
indicator will flash twice to signal that the
gears cannot be shifted down.
UP switches
Shifting
You can shift gears up and down by
operating the shift lever or the steering
shift switches.
NOTE
l
If the steering shift switches on both sides
(left and right) are operated simultaneously,
the gear will shift once.
l
The gear will not shift if:
l
The steering shift switch and the shift
lever are operated simultaneously.
The UP switch and DOWN switch are
operated simultaneously.
WARNING
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers or thumbs on
the steering shift switches:
l
Manually Shifting up
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
(M1→M2→M3→M4→M5→M6)
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift
lever back ( ) once.
NOTE
l
When driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up depending on vehicle speed.
l
In manual shift mode, gears do not shift up
automatically. Do not run the engine with
the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE. If
the tachometer needle enters the RED
ZONE, you may feel engine-braking
because the fuel delivery will be stopped to
protect the engine. However, this does not
indicate an abnormality.
l
When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transmission will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed (Except
M2→M1).
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Manually Shifting down
WARNING
(M6→M5→M4→M3→M2→M1)
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shift
lever forward ( ) once.
Do not use engine braking on slippery
road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers or thumbs on
the steering shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
To shift down to a lower gear with the
steering shift switches, press either of the
DOWN switches away from you once
with your thumb.
DOWN switches
NOTE
l
When driving at high speeds, the gear may
not shift down depending on vehicle speed.
l
During deceleration, the gear may
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
l
When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transmission will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed (Except
M2→M1).
Second gear fixed mode
When the shift lever is tapped back (
while the vehicle is stopped, the
transmission is set in the second gear
)
fixed mode. The gear is fixed in second
while in this mode for easier starting and
driving on slippery roads. If the shift lever
is tapped back ( ) or forward ( ) while
in the second gear fixed mode, the mode
will be canceled.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Shifting specification
Shifting up
NOTE
The gear does not shift down to M1
automatically while in the second gear fixed
mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than the
speed specified for each gear, the gear
cannot be shifted up to a higher gear.
If the vehicle is kicked down at the
following speeds or lower, the gears shift
down automatically:
Gear
Vehicle speed
Between 0 and 18 km/h
(0 and 11 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Gear
M6→M5
Vehicle speed
190 km/h (118 mph)
125 km/h (77 mph)
125 km/h (77 mph)
78 km/h (48 mph)
78 km/h (48 mph)
50 km/h (31 mph)
50 km/h (31 mph)
M1→M2
M6→M4
M5→M4
M5→M3
M4→M3
M4→M2
M3→M2
Between 22 and 32 km/h
(13 and 19 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
M2→M3
M3→M4
Between 40 and 48 km/h
(25 and 29 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
M4→M5
Recommendations for shifting
Upshifting
Between 50 and 68 km/h
(31 and 42 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
M5→M6
For normal acceleration, we recommend these shift
points.
Shifting down
Gear
M1 to M2
Vehicle speed
24 km/h (15 mph)
If the vehicle speed is higher than the
speed specified for each gear, the gear
cannot be shifted to a lower gear so as to
protect the transmission.
M2 to M3
M3 to M4
M4 to M5
M5 to M6
40 km/h (25 mph)
53 km/h (33 mph)
59 km/h (37 mph)
78 km/h (49 mph)
Gear
M5→M4
Vehicle speed
164 km/h (102 mph)
117 km/h (72 mph)
80 km/h (49 mph)
35 km/h (21 mph)
For cruising
M4→M3
M3→M2
M2→M1
Gear
M1 to M2
M2 to M3
M3 to M4
M4 to M5
M5 to M6
Vehicle speed
22 km/h (14 mph)
27 km/h (17 mph)
41 km/h (26 mph)
56 km/h (35 mph)
64 km/h (40 mph)
During deceleration, the gears shift down
automatically when speed is reduced to
the following:
Gear
M6→M5
Vehicle speed
47 km/h (29 mph)
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
gives better acceleration when you need
more speed.
M5→M4
M4→M3
M3→M2
M2→M1
38 km/h (23 mph)
20 km/h (12 mph)
15 km/h (9 mph)
12 km/h (7 mph)
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a
slow speed.
qDirect Modeí
Direct mode can be used for temporarily
switching gears by operating the steering
shift switch while the vehicle is being
driven with the selector lever in the D
range.
While in direct mode, the D and M
indicator lights illuminate and the gear
position in use is illuminated.
Direct mode is canceled (released) under
the following conditions.
l
The vehicle is driven at a constant
speed.
l
The needle in the tachometer
approaches the red zone.
The vehicle is driven at a constant
speed and the accelerator pedal is
heavily depressed.
Direct mode indicator
Gear position indicator
l
NOTE
Shifting up and down while in direct mode may
not be possible depending on the vehicle
speed. In addition, because direct mode is
canceled (released) depending on the rate of
acceleration or if the accelerator is fully
depressed, use of the manual shift mode is
recommended if you need to drive the vehicle
in a particular gear for long periods.
qDriving Tips
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmission will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-19
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Climbing steep grades from a stop
Power Steering
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
Power steering is only operable when the
engine is running. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system is inoperable,
you can still steer, but it requires more
physical effort.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release the brake pedal while
gradually accelerating.
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight
and grade steepness. Descend slowly,
using the brakes only occasionally to
prevent them from overheating.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running.
This could damage the power
steering system.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qActivation/Deactivation
Cruise Controlí
To activate the system, press the ON/OFF
switch.
The cruise main indicator light
illuminates.
With cruise control, you can set and
automatically maintain any speed of more
than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the
following conditions:
To deactivate the system, press the switch
again.
The cruise main indicator light turns off.
Using the cruise control under the
following conditions is dangerous
and could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Ø Hilly terrain
Ø Steep inclines
Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic
Ø Slippery or winding roads
Ø Similar restrictions that require
inconsistent speed
qCruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)
WARNING
Keep the ON/OFF switch off when
cruise control is not in use:
Leaving the ON/OFF switch on when
not using the cruise control is
dangerous as you may hit one of the
other buttons and put the vehicle in
cruise control unexpectedly. This
could result in loss of vehicle control.
The indicator light has two colors.
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
qTo Set Speed
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and
the cruise control system is activated.
1. Activate the cruise control system by
pressing the ON/OFF switch.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 30 km/h (19 mph).
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-21
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
3. Press down the cruise control SET/-
switch and release it at the speed you
want. Release the accelerator
simultaneously.
qTo Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press up the cruise control RES/+ switch
and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
Cruise
control
switch
Cruise
control
switch
Do not continue to hold the switch. Until
you release it, speed will continue to drop
(unless you continue to accelerate) and
you'll miss the desired speed.
NOTE
Your vehicle has a tap-up feature that
allows you to increase your current speed
in increments of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a
momentary tap of the cruise control RES/
+ switch. Multiple taps will increase your
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each
tap.
l
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while ascending,
or speed up while descending.
l
Cruise control will turn off if vehicle speed
drops below 30 km/h (19 mph) when cruise
is activated, such as when climbing a steep
grade.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Your vehicle has a tap-down feature that
allows you to decrease your current speed
in decrements of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a
momentary tap of the cruise control SET/-
switch. Multiple taps will decrease your
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each
tap.
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed.
Press down the cruise control SET/-
switch and release it immediately.
qTo Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 30 km/h (19 mph)
Cruise
control
switch
If some other method besides the ON/
OFF switch was used to cancel cruising
speed (such as applying the brake pedal)
and the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically resume
when the cruise control RES/+ switch is
pressed up.
If vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (19
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 30
km/h (19 mph) or more and press up the
cruise control RES/+ switch.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on. Greater speed
will not interfere with or change the set speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator to return to
the set speed.
Cruise
control
switch
qTo Decrease Cruising Speed
Press down the cruise control SET/-
switch and hold it. The vehicle will
gradually slow.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
qTo Cancel
Cruise
control
switch
To cancel the system, use one of these
methods:
l
Press the ON/OFF switch.
Slightly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
l
l
transmission only).
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
Press the CANCEL switch.
Traction Control System
(TCS)í
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by
controlling engine torque and braking.
When the TCS detects driving wheel
slippage, it lowers engine torque and
operates the brakes to prevent loss of
traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels
without causing them to spin and lose
traction.
The system turns off when the ignition is
switched off.
NOTE
Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9
mph) below the preset speed (such as may
happen when climbing a long, steep grade).
WARNING
Do not rely on the traction control
system as a substitute for safe driving:
The traction control system (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive
at reduced speeds when roads are
covered with ice and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction
devices on snow and/or ice-covered
roads is dangerous. The traction
control system (TCS) alone cannot
provide adequate traction and you
NOTE
To turn off the TCS, press the DSC OFF switch
(page 5-27).
5-24
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC)í
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip
enhancing vehicle safety.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
Refer to ABS (page 5-8) and TCS (page
5-24).
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not rely on the dynamic stability
control as a substitute for safe driving:
The dynamic stability control (DSC)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
NOTE
l
In addition to the indicator light flashing, a
slight lugging sound will come from the
engine. This indicates that the TCS is
operating properly.
l
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it
will be impossible to achieve high rpm
when the TCS is on.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-25
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qDSC OFF Indicator Light
CAUTION
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly
unless the following are observed:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Use tires of the correct size
specified for your Mazda on all
four wheels.
Use tires of the same
manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
Do not mix worn tires.
This indicator light stays on for a few
to the ON position.
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly
when tire chains are used or a
temporary spare tire is installed
because the tire diameter changes.
Ø If repair or replacement of the
steering or other surrounding
equipment is necessary, have it
done at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. If the center position of the
steering deviates, the DSC may not
operate correctly because there is
a sensor in the steering which
detects driving conditions.
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is
switched off (page 5-27).
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is
not switched off, take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic
stability control may have a malfunction.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is
replaced, the DSC will be inoperable. In this
case, the DSC OFF indicator light flashes and
the TCS/DSC indicator light illuminates.
To make the DSC operable, do the following
procedure with the battery connected.
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn
it counterclockwise fully.
3. Make sure the DSC OFF indicator turn off.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, then turn it to the ON position
again.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
5. Make sure the TCS/DSC indicator light
turns off.
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the DSC
OFF indicator light remain illuminated even
after turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
l
qDSC OFF Switch
When DSC is on and you attempt to free the
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of
freshly fallen snow, the TCS (part of the
DSC system) will activate. Depressing the
accelerator will not increase engine power
and freeing the vehicle may be difficult.
When this happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.
If the TCS/DSC is off when the engine is
turned off, it automatically activates when
the ignition switch is turned on.
Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide the
best stability. When the TCS/DSC is off, the
TCS/DSC does not activate but the brake
LSD (Limited Slip Differentials) function
remains.
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the
TCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator light
will illuminate.
l
l
l
If the DSC OFF switch is pressed and held
for a second or more, the TCS/DSC system
may become inoperative due to the system
detecting switch trouble. If the TCS/DSC
system becomes inoperative, the TCS/DSC
and the DSC OFF indicator lights
Press the switch again to turn the TCS/
DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicator
light will go out.
illuminate simultaneously. In this case, turn
off the engine and restart it to restore the
TCS/DSC.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.
If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the
warning light in the instrument panel and by the warning beep sound.
The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to
the receiver unit in the vehicle.
Tire pressure sensors
NOTE
When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also lower.
When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS warning light
may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving, and check tire
pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures, use of a digital tire
pressure gauge is recommended.
TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires
regularly.
5-28
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
CAUTION
Ø Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Ø Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Ø To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a
problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or
blow out.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
WARNING
Warning Light
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is
too low in one or more tires, and flashes
when there is a system malfunction.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure. Refer to the specification charts
(page 10-7).
NOTE
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
CAUTION
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may
require some time for the TPMS warning
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.
Tires lose air naturally over time and the
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too
soft over time or you have a flat. However,
when you find one low tire in a set of four-
that is an indication of trouble; you should
have someone drive the vehicle slowly
forward so you can inspect any low tire for
cuts and any metal objects sticking through
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be
addressed by more than simply refilling the
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems
and order the best replacement tire for your
vehicle.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there
may be a tire puncture.
Refer to Vehicle with run-flat tires on
page 7-3.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
If the tire pressures decrease extremely
after the TPMS warning light has
illuminated, or if a tire is punctured, the
a beep sound will be heard for
approximately 30 seconds.
Vehicles with Instant Mobility System
(IMS) emergency flat tire repair kit
If an emergency tire repair is needed,
repair the punctured tire with the
Refer to Vehicle with run-flat tires on
page 7-3.
emergency flat tire repair kit (page 7-7).
qSystem Error Activation
CAUTION
Do not use non-genuine tire sealant.
It may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
When the TPMS warning light flashes,
there may be a system malfunction.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A system error activation may occur in
the following cases:
Vehicles with optional temporary spare
tire
l
When there is equipment or a device
near the vehicle using the same radio
frequency as that of the tire pressure
sensors.
If you have bought the optional temporary
spare tire, replace the punctured tire with
the temporary spare tire. Refer to the
manufacturer's instructions.
l
When a metallic device such as a non-
genuine navigation system is equipped
near the center of the dashboard, which
may block radio signals from the tire
pressure sensor to the receiver unit.
Warning light flashes
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
When using the following devices in
the vehicle that may cause radio
interference with the receiver unit.
l
qFlat Tire Warning Light
A digital device such as a personal
computer.
A current converter device such as a
l
DC-AC converter.
When excess snow or ice adheres to
l
the vehicle, especially around the
wheels.
When the tire pressure sensor batteries
l
are exhausted.
When using a wheel with no tire
pressure sensor installed.
When using tires with steel wire
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
l
l
reinforcement in the side walls.
When using tire chains.
l
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
3. After about 15 minutes, drive the
vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h
(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire
pressure sensor ID signal code will be
registered automatically.
qTires and Wheels
CAUTION
When inspecting or adjusting the tire
air pressures, do not apply excessive
force to the stem part of the wheel
unit. The stem part could be
damaged.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven within about 15 minutes
of changing tires, the tire pressure monitoring
system warning light will flash because the
sensor ID signal code would not have been
registered. If this happens, park the vehicle for
about 15 minutes, after which the sensor ID
signal code will register upon driving the
vehicle for 10 minutes.
Changing tires and wheels
The following procedure allows the
TPMS to recognize a tire pressure sensor's
unique ID signal code whenever tires or
wheels are changed, such as changing to
and from winter tires.
Replacing tires and wheels
NOTE
Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID
signal code. The signal code must be
registered with the TPMS before it can work.
The easiest way to do it is to have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer change your tire and
complete ID signal code registration.
CAUTION
Ø When replacing/repairing the tires
or wheels or both, have the work
done by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors
may be damaged.
Ø The wheels equipped on your
Mazda are specially designed for
installation of the tire pressure
sensors. Do not use non-genuine
wheels, otherwise it may not be
possible to install the tire pressure
sensors.
When having tires changed at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer
Tire pressure sensor ID signal code
registration is completed when an
Authorized Mazda Dealer changes your
vehicle's tires.
When changing tires yourself
Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors
installed whenever tires or wheels are
replaced.
If you or someone else changes tires, you
or someone else can also undertake the
steps for the TPMS to complete the ID
signal code registration.
When having a tire or wheel or both
replaced, the following types of tire
pressure sensor installations are possible.
1. After tires have been changed, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position, then
turn it back to the ACC or LOCK
position.
l
The tire pressure sensor is removed
from the old wheel and installed to the
new one.
The same tire pressure sensor is used
l
with the same wheel. Only the tire is
replaced.
2. Wait for about 15 minutes.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
A new tire pressure sensor is installed
to a new wheel.
NOTE
l
The tire pressure sensor ID signal code
must be registered when a new tire pressure
sensor is purchased. For purchase of a tire
pressure sensor and registration of the tire
pressure sensor ID signal code, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
When reinstalling a previously removed tire
pressure sensor to a wheel, replace the
grommet (seal between valve body/sensor
and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
Meters and Gauges
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 5-38
Dashboard Illumination ..................................................................................... page 5-39
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge ................................................................................ page 5-39
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
qSpeedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of
the vehicle.
Odometer
Odometer
Odometer
q
Odometer, Trip Meter, Average
Fuel Economy Display, Outside
Temperature Display and Selector
Trip meter A
Trip meter B
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
Each time the selector is pressed the
display switches in the order of trip meter
A, trip meter B, the average fuel economy
display and the outside temperature
display.
Average fuel
economy
Odometer
Selector
Outside
temperature
Odometer
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip Meter
Average Fuel Economy Display
Outside Temperature Display
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total
distance of two trips. One is recorded in
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in
trip meter B.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and trip
meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter is
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by holding
the selector depressed for 1 second or
more. Use this meter to measure trip
distances and to compute fuel
NOTE
(Temperature unit change function)í
l
To change the outside temperature display
from Fahrenheit (°F) to Centigrade (°C),
press and hold the selector for several
seconds while the outside temperature is
displayed.
consumption.
l
Under the following conditions, the ambient
NOTE
temperature display may differ from the
actual ambient temperature depending on
the surroundings and vehicle conditions:
l
Only the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
l
The trip record will be erased when:
l
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.
Sudden changes in ambient temperature.
The vehicle is parked.
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.
l
The power supply is interrupted (blown
l
fuse or the battery is disconnected).
The vehicle is driven over 999.9 km
l
l
l
(mile).
qTachometer
Average fuel economy display
This mode displays the average fuel
economy by calculating the fuel
consumption and the distance traveled
since connecting the battery or resetting
the data.
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Manual Transmission
Average fuel economy will be calculated
and displayed every minute.
To clear the data being displayed, press
the selector for more than 1 second. After
pressing the selector, - - - L/100 km (- - -
mpg) will be displayed for about 1 minute
before the fuel economy is recalculated
and displayed.
Red zone
Outside temperature display
This mode displays the outside
temperature.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-37
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION
Driving with an overheated engine
can cause serious engine damage
(page 7-18).
Red zone
qFuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows approximately how
much fuel is remaining in the tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4
full. When the low fuel warning light
illuminates or when the needle is near E,
refuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
Low fuel
warning light
q
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge
shows the temperature of the engine
coolant.
NOTE
l
After refueling, it may require some time for
the needle to stabilize. In addition, the
needle may deviate while driving on a slope
or curve since the fuel moves in the tank.
l
The direction of the arrow (
) shows that
the fuel-filler lid is on the left side of the
vehicle.
If the needle is near H, it indicates
overheating.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
qEngine Oil Pressure Gauge
qDashboard Illumination
When the exterior lights are on, rotate the
knob to adjust the brightness of the
dashboard lights.
Normal range
Dim
Bright
Engine oil pressure is normal when the
engine oil pressure gauge needle points
within the normal range.
NOTE
If the needle on the gauge doesn't move
after starting the engine, follow steps 1
through 3.
This symbol ( ) indicates the knob to adjust
the brightness of the dashboard illumination.
If the engine oil pressure gauge moves to
L (low) while you are driving, drive to the
side of the road and park off the right-of-
way. Set the parking brake. Then follow
steps 1 through 3.
1. Turn off the engine and inspect the
engine oil level (page 8-19). If it's low,
add oil.
2. Start the engine.
3. If the needle still doesn't move, have
your vehicle checked at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Don't run the engine if the oil
pressure is low. It could result in
extensive engine damage.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Warning/Indicator Lights
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Brake System Warning Light
Page
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-45
Charging System Warning Light
Check Engine Light
ABS Warning Light
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light
Low Fuel Warning Light
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Door-Ajar Warning Light
Page
5-46
Automatic Transmission Warning Light
5-46
5-47
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Flat Tire Warning Light
5-49
5-49
5-51
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-52
5-52
5-53
KEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY Indicator Light (Green)
Security Indicator Light
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light
Shift Position Indicator Light
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
DSC OFF Indicator Light
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qBrake System Warning Light
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the
brake light is no longer illuminated.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning
The light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It turns off
when the parking brake is fully released.
warning light illuminated is
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
Low brake fluid level warning
If the light stays on after the parking brake
is fully released, you may have a brake
problem.
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way.
qABS Warning Light
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
depress or that it may go closer to the
floor. In either case, it will take longer to
stop the vehicle.
1. With the engine stopped, open the
hood and check the brake fluid level
immediately, and then add fluid if
required (page 8-22).
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
2. After adding fluid, check the light
again.
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
If the warning light remains on, or if the
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the light turns off have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
WARNING
l
When the engine is jump-started to charge
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs,
it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
l
(With DSC vehicles)
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated simultaneously is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
The brake assist system does not operate
while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
qCharging System Warning Light
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may illuminate the brake
system warning light and the ABS
warning light on simultaneously. The
problem is likely to be the electronic
brake force distribution system.
This warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off when the engine is
started.
If the warning light illuminates while
driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the
charging system warning light is
illuminated because the engine could
stop unexpectedly.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qCheck Engine Light
qAir Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off when the engine is
started.
If the air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
is working properly, the warning light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
If this light illuminates while driving, the
vehicle may have a problem. It is
important to note the driving conditions
when the light illuminated and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
The check engine light may illuminate in
the following cases:
l
The fuel tank level being very low or
approaching empty.
The engine's electrical system has a
l
problem.
The emission control system has a
l
WARNING
problem.
The fuel-filler cap is missing or not
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
l
tightened securely.
If the check engine light remains on or
flashes continuously, do not drive at high
speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Belt minder
qLow Fuel Warning Light
NOTE
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or
restore the seat belt minder.
Low fuel
warning light
Driver seated/Passenger not seated
The belt minder is a supplemental
warning to the seat belt warning function.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the warning light/beep
operates to give you further reminders
according to the chart below.
This warning light signals that the fuel
tank will soon be empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
qSeat Belt Warning Light/Beep
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
Indicator
Beep
The seat belt warning light illuminates
and a beep sound will be heard if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
Conditions of operation
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
Condition
Result
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard
position.
for about 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened while the warning
light and the beep sound are
activated.
The warning light
turns off and the beep
sound stops.
The driver's seat belt is
The warning light will
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be
position.
heard.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Driver seated/Passenger seated
The seat belt warning function reminds
the passenger to fasten the seat belt
according to the chart below.
qDoor-Ajar Warning Light
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
(Driver)
This warning light illuminates when any
door or the trunk is not securely closed.
Close the door or the trunk securely
before driving the vehicle.
Seat belt
(Passenger)
Indicator
Beep
qAutomatic Transmission Warning
Light
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
Placing heavy items on the passenger seat
may cause the passenger seat belt warning
function to operate depending on the
weight of the item.
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
The light illuminates when the
transmission has a problem.
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
CAUTION
NOTE
If the automatic transmission
warning light illuminates, the
transmission has an electrical
problem. Continuing to drive your
Mazda in this condition could cause
damage to your transmission.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible.
l
To allow the passenger seat weight sensor
to function properly, do not place and sit on
an additional seat cushion on the passenger
seat. The sensor may not function properly
because the additional seat cushion could
cause sensor interference.
l
When a small child sits on the passenger
seat, it is possible that neither the warning
light nor the warning beep operate.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
WARNING
(TPMS) Warning Lightí
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is
too low in one or more tires, and flashes
when there is a system malfunction.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-47
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure. Refer to the specification charts
(page 10-7).
NOTE
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
CAUTION
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may
require some time for the TPMS warning
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.
Tires lose air naturally over time and the
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too
soft over time or you have a flat. However,
when you find one low tire in a set of four-
that is an indication of trouble; you should
have someone drive the vehicle slowly
forward so you can inspect any low tire for
cuts and any metal objects sticking through
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be
addressed by more than simply refilling the
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems
and order the best replacement tire for your
vehicle.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there
may be a tire puncture.
Refer to Vehicle with run-flat tires on
page 7-3.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
If the tire pressures decrease extremely
after the TPMS warning light has
illuminated, or if a tire is punctured, the
a beep sound will be heard for
approximately 30 seconds.
Vehicles with Instant Mobility System
(IMS) emergency flat tire repair kit
If an emergency tire repair is needed,
repair the punctured tire with the
Refer to Vehicle with run-flat tires on
page 7-3.
emergency flat tire repair kit (page 7-7).
qKEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY
Indicator Light (Green) (with
Advanced Key)
CAUTION
Do not use non-genuine tire sealant.
It may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
Vehicles with optional temporary spare
tire
If you have bought the optional temporary
spare tire, replace the punctured tire with
the temporary spare tire. Refer to the
manufacturer's instructions.
This indicator has two colors.
KEY Warning Light (Red)
When illuminated
Warning light flashes
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, it illuminates
momentarily and then goes out.
If any malfunction occurs in the
qFlat Tire Warning Lightí
l
advanced keyless system, it illuminates
continuously.
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-49
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
l
Under the following conditions, the
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the KEY
warning light illuminated:
KEY warning light (red) will flash
continuously when the start knob has
not been returned to the LOCK
position to notify the driver that the
advanced key has been removed from
the vehicle. It will stop flashing when
the advanced key is back inside the
vehicle.
If the KEY warning light remains
illuminated, do not continue to drive
using the advanced key system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place and use
the auxiliary key to continue driving
the vehicle. Have the vehicle
l
The start knob has not been returned
inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
to the LOCK position, the driver's
door is open, and the advanced key
is removed from the vehicle.
When flashing
l
The start knob has not been returned
l
to the LOCK position and all the
doors are closed after removing the
advanced key from the vehicle.
Under the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) flashes to
inform the driver that the start knob
will not rotate to the ACC position
even if it is pushed in from the LOCK
position.
NOTE
The flashing KEY warning light (red) and the
beep sound operate simultaneously (page
3-22).
l
The advanced key battery is dead.
The advanced key is not within
l
operational range.
The advanced key is placed in areas
where it is difficult for the system to
detect the signal (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer
KEY Indicator Light (Green)
When illuminated
l
When the start knob is pushed in from the
LOCK position, the system confirms that
the correct advanced key is inside the
vehicle, the KEY indicator light (green)
illuminates, and the start knob can be
turned to the ACC position (page 3-10).
l
similar to the advanced key is in the
operational range.
When flashing
When the advanced key battery power is
low, the KEY indicator light flashes for 30
the ON position to the ACC or LOCK
position. Replace with a new battery
before the advanced key becomes
unusable (page 3-7).
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator
indicator light (green) does not flash even if
the battery power is low.
Light
Refer to Setting Change (Function
Customization)(page 3-21).
qSecurity Indicator Light
This light indicates one of two things:
l
The high-beam headlights are on.
The turn signal lever is in the flash-to-
l
pass position.
qShift Position Indicator Light
This indicator light starts flashing every 2
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
from the ON to the ACC position and the
immobilizer system is armed.
(Automatic Transmission)
This indicates the selected shift position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The light stops flashing when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the correct ignition key.
At this time, the immobilizer system is
disarmed and the light illuminates for
about 3 seconds and then turns off.
If the engine does not start with the
correct ignition key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating or
flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Gear position indicator
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Gear position indicator
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is
replaced, the DSC will be inoperable. In this
case, the DSC OFF indicator light flashes and
the TCS/DSC indicator light illuminates.
To make the DSC operable, do the following
procedure with the battery connected.
The gear position indicator displays the
gear in use while in either manual shift or
direct mode.
qTCS/DSC Indicator Lightí
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn
it counterclockwise fully.
3. Make sure the DSC OFF indicator turn off.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, then turn it to the ON position
again.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
5. Make sure the TCS/DSC indicator light
turns off.
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the DSC
OFF indicator light remain illuminated even
after turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qDSC OFF Indicator Lightí
qCruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)í
This indicator light stays on for a few
to the ON position.
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is
switched off (page 5-27).
The indicator light has two colors.
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and
the cruise control system is activated.
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is
not switched off, take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic
stability control may have a malfunction.
5-52
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
Beep Sounds
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
qSeat Belt Warning Beep
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, a beep sound will be heard
for about 6 seconds.
qTurn-Signal/Hazard Warning
Indicator Lights
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and
the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than
will be heard again for a specified period
of time.
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep on
page 5-45.
When operating the turn signal lights, the
left or right turn signal indicator light
flashes to indicate which turn signal light
is operating (page 5-57).
qIgnition Key Reminder
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position with the key inserted, a
continuous beep sound will be heard
when the driver's door is opened.
When operating the hazard warning
lights, both turn signal indicator lights
flash (page 5-60).
NOTE
qLights-On Reminder
If an indicator light remains illuminated (does
not flash) or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out.
If lights are on and the key is removed
from the ignition switch, a continuous
beep sound will be heard when the
driver's door is opened.
NOTE
When the advanced keyless function is used
and the start knob is in the ACC position, the
Start Knob Not in Lock Warning Beep (page
3-19) overrides the lights-on reminder.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qTire Inflation Pressure Warning
Beepí
The warning beep sound will be heard for
about 3 seconds if the tire pressures
decrease.
beep sound will be heard for
approximately 30 seconds.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
on page 5-28.
qAdvanced Keyless Warning (with
Advanced Key)
Warning indicators for the advanced key,
such as “the advanced key removed from
warning/indicator lights in the instrument
cluster.
Refer to Warning and Beep Sounds on
page 3-19.
5-54
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Lighting Control
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement
is necessary.
NOTE
If the headlights flicker, or the brightness
weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a
replacement is necessary. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qHeadlights
To turn on the lights, turn the headlight
switch on the end of the control lever.
qLights-On Reminder
Switch Position
Headlights
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
If lights are on and the key is removed
from the ignition switch, a continuous
beep sound will be heard when the
driver's door is opened.
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard
NOTE
illumination
When the advanced keyless function is used
and the start knob is in the ACC position, the
Start Knob Not in Lock Warning Beep (page
3-19) overrides the lights-on reminder.
NOTE
To prevent discharging the battery, don't leave
the lights on while the engine is off unless
safety requires them.
í
Xenon fusion headlight bulbs
The low-beam bulbs of the headlights
have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a
bright white beam over a wide area.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-55
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qHeadlight High-Low Beam
qDaytime Running Lights (Canada)
Push the lever forward for high beam.
Pull back to original position for low
beam.
In Canada, vehicles must be driven with
the headlights on during daytime
operation.
For that reason, the daytime running lights
automatically turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
High beam
NOTE
The Daytime Running Lights turn off when the
Low beam
parking brake is applied.
qFlashing the Headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully
toward you. The headlight switch does
not need to be on, and the lever will return
to the normal position when released.
OFF
Flashing
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Fog Lightsí
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
They help you to see as well as to be seen.
qTurn Signal
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the fog
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
light switch to the
position.
The headlight switch must be in the
position to turn on the fog lights.
If the indicator light continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
its original position.
Right turn
Right lane change
OFF
Fog light switch
Left lane change
Left turn
To turn them off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position or turn the
headlight switch to the or OFF
position.
Green indicators on the dashboard show
which signal is working.
NOTE
The fog lights will turn off when the headlights
are set at high beam.
Lane-change signals
Move the lever slightly toward the
direction of the change ―until the
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It
will return to the off position when
released.
NOTE
If an indicator light stays on without flashing
or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn
signal bulbs may be burned out.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-57
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
NOTE
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper
blades, the wiper motor is protected from
motor breakdown, overheating and possible
fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will
automatically stop operation of the blades, but
only for about 5 minutes.
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and
park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow
and ice.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the
blades should operate normally. If they do not
resume functioning, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to
the side of the road and park off the right-of-
way. Wait until the weather clears before trying
to drive with the wipers inoperative.
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
Only use windshield washer fluid
mixed with anti-freeze protection in
freezing weather conditions:
Using windshield washer fluid
without anti-freeze protection in
freezing weather conditions is
dangerous as it could freeze on the
windshield and block your vision
which could cause an accident.
In addition, make sure the
qWindshield Wipers
windshield is sufficiently warmed
using the defroster before spraying
the washer fluid.
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever
down.
INT ― Intermittent
LO ― Low speed
HI ― High speed
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever
up to MIST.
MIST ― Mist
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qWindshield Washer
Rear Window Defroster
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer fluid.
The rear window defroster clears frost,
fog, and thin ice from the rear window.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
OFF
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defroster, the indicator light will
illuminate.
Washer
Press the switch again to turn it off.
NOTE
With the wiper lever in the OFF or INT
position, the wipers will operate continuously
until the lever is released.
Indicator light
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fluid level (page 8-23). If it's normal,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defroster grid inside the window.
NOTE
This defroster is not designed for melting snow.
If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear
window, remove it before using the defroster.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Horn
Hazard Warning Flasher
To sound the horn, press the
the steering wheel.
mark on
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all
the turn signals will flash.
NOTE
l
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l
Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
HomeLink Wireless
Control Systemí
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink system with
any garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature:
Using the HomeLink system with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards
is dangerous. (This includes garage
doors manufactured before April 1,
1982.)
NOTE
HomeLink and HomeLink house are registered
trademarks of Johnson Controls.
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3
hand-held transmitters with a single built-
in component in the auto-dimming mirror.
Pressing the HomeLink button on the
auto-dimming mirror activates garage
doors, gates and other devices
Using these garage door openers can
increase the risk of serious injury or
death. For further information,
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515
or www.homelink.com or your
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
surrounding your home.
Indicator light
Always check the areas surrounding
garage doors and gates for people or
obstructions before programming or
during operation of the HomeLink
system:
Programming or operating the
HomeLink system without verifying
the safety of areas surrounding
garage doors and gates is dangerous
and could result in an unexpected
accident and serious injury if
someone were to be hit.
HomeLink button
CAUTION
HomeLink has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the device.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-61
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
NOTE
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL3
CANADA:4112A-OBIHL3
This device complies with FCC rules part 15.
Operation is subject to the following
conditions:
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons
which can be individually selected and
programmed using the transmitters for
current, on-market devices as follows:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons (buttons one and
three) ― releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat step 1 to program a second and/
or third hand-held transmitter to the
remaining two HomeLink buttons.
1- This device may not cause any harmful
interference and
2- This device must accept any interference
that may be received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
The programming will not be erased even if
the battery is disconnected.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)
away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program while keeping the
indicator light in view.
qPre-programming the HomeLink
System
NOTE
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons. Do not release the
buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
NOTE
l
Verify that there is a remote control
Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming
Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
transmitter available for the device you
would like to program.
Disconnect the power to the device.
l
q
Programming the HomeLink System
4. After the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light, release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
CAUTION
When programming a garage door
opener or a gate, disconnect the
power to these devices before
performing programming, as
continuous operation of the devices
could damage the motor.
NOTE
If the HomeLink indicator light does not
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-
800-355-3515 for assistance.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light.
HomeLink should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.
Do not repeat step 1.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-
800-355-3515.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.
Do not repeat step 1.
qGate operator/Canadian
Programming
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
“Programming” steps 6―8 to complete
the programming of a rolling code
equipped device (most commonly a
garage door opener).
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission ―
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
6. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
by using the “Programming” procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with
the following:
7. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE
NOTE
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
during the “cycling” process to prevent
possible overheating.
8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release ―
every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-
held transmitter until the frequency signal
has successfully been accepted by
HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to
complete.
qOperating the HomeLink System
Press the programmed HomeLink button
to operate a programmed device. The
code will continue being transmitted for a
maximum of 20 seconds.
qReprogramming the HomeLink
system
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with
“Programming” - step 2.
qErasing Programmed HomeLink
Buttons
To erase the existing programming from
all three operating channels, press and
hold the two outside buttons (
,
)
on the auto-dimming mirror until the
HomeLink indicator light begins to flash
after approximately 20 seconds.
Verify that the programming has been
erased when you resell the vehicle.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
6
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
Types of the Climate Control System ....................................... 6-5
Antenna ................................................................................... 6-15
Audio Control Switch Operationí ......................................... 6-56
Safety Certification ................................................................. 6-60
Basic Bluetooth Hands-Free Operation................................... 6-64
Convenient Use of the Hands-Free System ............................. 6-68
Hands-Free Telephone Setting ................................................ 6-73
When Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used .......................... 6-78
Storage Compartments ............................................................ 6-82
Accessory Socket .................................................................... 6-83
Windblocker ............................................................................ 6-84
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qParking in Direct Sunlight
Operating Tips
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then run
the climate control system.
qOperating the Climate Control
System
Operate the climate control system with
the engine running.
qNot Using for a Long Period
NOTE
Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes
at least once a month to keep internal
parts lubricated.
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the fan control dial on for a long
period of time with the ignition switch in the
ON position when the engine is not running.
qCheck the Refrigerant before the
Weather Gets Hot
qClearing the Air Inlet
Have the air conditioner checked before
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
efficient. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for refrigerant inspection.
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,
snow and ice from the hood and the air
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the
system efficiency.
qFoggy Windows
The air conditioner is filled with
HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will
not damage the ozone layer.
If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant
or has a malfunction, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The windows may fog up easily in humid
weather. Use the climate control system to
defog the windows.
To help defog the windows, operate the
air conditioner to dehumidify the air.
NOTE
The air conditioner may be used along with the
heater to dehumidify the air.
qOutside/Recirculated Air Position
Use the outside air position in normal
conditions. The recirculated air position
should be used only when driving on
dusty roads or for quick cooling of the
interior.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Vent Operation
Button
qAdjusting the Vents
Directing airflow
You can direct air flow by rotating the vent.
Opening/closing vents
The two outside vents can be opened and closed with center button.
NOTE
When using the air conditioner, mist may come out from the vents. This is not a sign of trouble but a
result of humid air being suddenly cooled.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qSelecting the Airflow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Dashboard Vents (OPEN MODE)
Floor Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents (OPEN MODE)
Defroster and Floor Vents
Floor Vents (OPEN MODE)
Defroster Vents
You will feel more comfortable by using
the OPEN MODE when opening the roof.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Manual type and automatic type climate control systems are explained separately. Check
your vehicle's climate control type and read the appropriate pages.
Manual Type ............................................................................................................ page 6-6
Automatic Type ...................................................................................................... page 6-11
Type A
Type B
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Manual Typeí
Fan control dial
Mode selector dial
Temperature control dial
Air intake selector
A/C switch
Some models.
Fan control dial
qControl Switches
Temperature control dial
Slow
Fast
Cold
Hot
Turn the dial to adjust to the desired fan
speed.
Turning the dial clockwise increases the
fan speed.
Turning the dial counterclockwise
decreases the fan speed.
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
6-6
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Mode selector dial
NOTE
l
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
l
When the mode is set to
,
or
with the fan control dial in a position other
than 0 and the temperature control dial in
the maximum cold position, the air intake
selector switches to the recirculated air
mode and the A/C turns on automatically.
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch
to turn it off.
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airflow mode (page 6-4).
If recirculated air mode is not desired,
press the air intake selector to switch to
outside air mode.
NOTE
Turn the mode selector dial to an OPEN
MODE position for maximum comfort while
the roof is open.
Air intake selector
í
A/C switch
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Press the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan
control dial is in any position except OFF.
Press the
switch to alternate
between the outside air and recirculated
air modes.
Press the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
It is recommended that under normal
conditions the switch be kept in the
outside air mode.
Outside air mode (indicator light
turned off)
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use
this mode for normal ventilation and
heating.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-7
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Recirculated air mode (indicator light
illuminated)
NOTE
l
If the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
If cooler air is desired at face level, set the
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated.
l
l
l
mode selector dial at the
position and
adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
This mode can be used when driving on a
dusty road or in similar conditions. It also
helps to provide quicker cooling of the
interior.
WARNING
Do not use the recirculated air mode in
cold or rainy weather:
In the
,
, or
position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
(however, the indicator light does not
illuminate) and the outside air mode is
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield.
Using the recirculated air mode in
cold or rainy weather is dangerous as
it will cause the windows to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident.
In the or
position, the outside air
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated
air mode.
qHeating
qCooling (With Air Conditioner)í
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
or
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
or
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
5. Adjust the fan control dial and
temperature control dial to maintain
maximum comfort.
6-8
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging
CAUTION
When using the air conditioner while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffic, closely monitor the
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the gauge indicates
overheating, turn the air conditioner
off (page 7-18).
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
WARNING
NOTE
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
control set to the cold position:
l
When maximum cooling is desired, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme cold
position and set the air intake selector to
the recirculated air mode, then turn the fan
control dial fully clockwise.
Using the
position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
l
l
If warmer air is desired at floor level, set
the mode selector dial at the
or
position and adjust the temperature control
dial to maintain maximum comfort.
The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
accident. Set the temperature control
to the hot or warm position when
using the
position.
NOTE
l
For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme hot
position and turn the fan control dial fully
clockwise.
If warm air is desired at the floor, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
qVentilation
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
or
l
l
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air mode.
In the
,
, or
position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
(however, the indicator light does not
illuminate) and the outside air mode is
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
In the or
position, the outside air
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated
air mode.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qDehumidifying (With Air
Conditioner)í
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
desired position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air mode.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner is
dehumidifying the air and, to use this function,
the temperature does not have to be set to cold.
Therefore, set the temperature control dial to
the desired position (hot or cold) and turn on
the air conditioner when you want to
dehumidify the cabin air.
6-10
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Automatic Typeí
Type A
Mode selector dial
Temperature control dial
Fan control dial
Air intake selector
A/C switch
Type B
Mode selector dial
Temperature control dial
Fan control dial
Air intake selector
A/C switch
íSome models.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Mode selector dial
qControl Switches
Temperature control dial
Cold
Hot
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airflow mode (page 6-4).
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
AUTO position
The airflow mode automatically adjusts to
the selected temperature.
NOTE
Turn the dial completely left to set the
temperature to maximum cooling, and
completely right for maximum heating.
Except AUTO position
The desired airflow position can be
selected by turning the dial.
Fan control dial
NOTE
With the airflow mode set to
position and
the temperature control dial set at a medium
temperature, heated air is directed to the feet
and a comparably lower air temperature will
flow through the central, left and right vents.
Slow
Fast
A/C switch
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
AUTO position
The amount of airflow will be
automatically controlled in accordance
with the set temperature.
Except AUTO position
With the fan control dial ON, press the
A/C switch to select the air conditioning
(cooling/dehumidifying functions) on or
off.
The airflow amount can be adjusted to the
desired level by turning the dial.
OFF position
To turn off the system, set the dial to OFF.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
NOTE
WARNING
l
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
Do not use the
position in cold or
rainy weather:
l
Using the
position in cold or
(Type B)
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
When the mode is set to
,
or
with the fan control dial in a position other
than 0 and the temperature control dial in
the maximum cold position, the air intake
selector switches to the recirculated air
mode and the A/C turns on automatically. If
A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch to
turn it off. If recirculated air mode is not
desired, press the air intake selector to
switch to outside air mode.
qOperation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Set the mode selector dial to the AUTO
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turned off).
Air intake selector
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the AUTO
position.
5. Turn on the air conditioner.
To turn off the system, set the fan control
dial to OFF.
Outside or recirculated air positions can
be selected. Press the switch to select
outside/recirculated air positions.
NOTE
l
Setting the temperature to maximum high
or low will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
To prevent cool air blowing from the vents
when heating right after starting the
engine, the amount of airflow is reduced
until the air warms up.
Recirculated air position (indicator
light illuminated)
l
Use this position when going through
tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high
engine exhaust areas) or when quick
cooling is desired.
l
Turn the mode selector dial to an OPEN
MODE position for maximum comfort
while the roof is open. When the mode
selector dial is turned to the AUTO
position, OPEN MODE ( ) and (
vents will not be selected automatically.
Select them manually.
Outside air position (indicator light
turned off)
Use this position for normal conditions
and defogging.
)
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging
Set the mode selector dial to the
position and turn the fan control dial to
the desired speed.
Sunlight sensor
The outside air position is automatically
selected. The air conditioner will
automatically turn on and direct
dehumidified air to the front windshield
and side windows.
WARNING
Set the temperature control to hot or
warm position when using the
position:
Using the
position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
Interior temperature
sensor
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to increase
the air flow temperature and defog the
windshield more quickly.
qSunlight/Temperature Sensor
The automatic air conditioner function
measures inside and outside temperatures,
and sunlight. It then sets temperatures
inside the passenger compartment
accordingly.
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the automatic air
conditioner will not operate properly.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qSatellite Radio Antennaí
Antenna
The satellite radio antenna receives
SIRIUS signals.
qAM/FM Radio Antenna
To remove the antenna, turn it
counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
Make sure the antenna is securely
installed.
Install
Remove
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the antenna,
remove it before entering a car wash
facility or passing beneath a low
overhead clearance.
NOTE
When leaving your vehicle unattended, we
recommend that you remove the antenna and
store it inside the vehicle.
íSome models.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qRadio Reception
Operating Tips for Audio
System
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach
longer distances than FM signals. Because
of this, two stations may sometimes be
picked up on the same frequency at the
same time.
WARNING
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle:
Adjusting the audio while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident. Always adjust the
audio while the vehicle is stopped.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
Ionosphere
Station 1
Station 2
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40―50 km (25―30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
CAUTION
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level
that allows you to hear sounds
outside of the vehicle including car
horns and particularly emergency
vehicle sirens.
FM Station
NOTE
l
To prevent the battery from being
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
discharged, do not leave the audio system
on for a long period of time when the
engine is not running.
l
If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in
or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to
occur from the audio system, however, this
does not indicate that the system has been
damaged.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do reflect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
Flutter/Skip noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
Ionosphere
FM wave
AM wave
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days
may provide better reception than clear
days.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from
the transmitter. Reception in such fringe
areas is characterized by sound breakup.
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reflected signal at
the same time. This causes a slight delay
in reception and may be heard as a broken
sound or a distortion. This problem may
also be encountered when in close
proximity to the transmitter.
Reflected wave
Direct
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Strong signal noise
qOperating Tips for CD Player/In-
Dash CD Changer
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are
extremely strong, so the result is noise and
sound breakup at the radio receiver.
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in the
CD player/In-dash CD changer may
become clouded with condensation. At
this time, the CD will eject immediately
when placed in the unit. A clouded CD
can be corrected simply by wiping it with
a soft cloth. Clouded optical components
will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait
for normal operation to return before
attempting to use the unit.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Handling the CD player/In-dash CD
changer
The following precautions should be
observed.
l
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
Station 2
88.3 MHz
Station 1
88.1 MHz
l
Do not insert any objects, other than
CDs, into the slot.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
The CD revolves at high speed within
the unit. Defective (cracked or badly
bent) CDs should never be used.
A new CD may have rough edges on
its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc
with rough edges is used, proper
setting will not be possible and the CD
player/In-dash CD changer will not
play the CD. In addition, the disc may
not eject resulting in a malfunction.
Remove the rough edges in advance by
using a ball-point pen or pencil as
shown below. To remove the rough
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil
against the inner and outer perimeter of
the CD.
l
Do not use non-conventional discs
such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,
etc. The disc may not eject resulting in
a malfunction.
l
When driving over uneven surfaces,
the sound may jump.
l
If the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use
the disc.
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer has
been designed to play CDs bearing the
identification logo as shown. No other
discs can be played.
Transparent
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
l
Use discs that have been legitimately
Insert discs one by one. If two discs are
inserted at the same time, the system
may not operate properly.
The CD player/In-dash CD changer
ejects the CD if the CD is inserted
upside down. Also dirty and/or
defective CDs may be ejected.
An 8 cm (3 in) CD cannot be played in
the CD player even if an 8 cm (3 in)
CD adapter is used.
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system
may not operate properly.
l
An 8 cm (3 in) CD cannot be played in
the In-dash CD changer even if an 8
cm (3 in) CD adapter is used.
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player/In-dash CD changer.
l
Be sure never to touch the signal
l
l
l
surface when handling the CDs. Pick
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal affixed to it.
This unit may not be able to play
certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a
computer or music CD recorder due to
disc characteristics, scratches,
smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or
condensation on the lens inside the
unit.
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
l
l
Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
l
l
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
l
Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can
This unit may not be able to play
certain discs made using a computer
due to the application (writing
software) setting used. (For details,
consult the store where the application
was purchased.)
It is possible that certain text data, such
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical
data (CD-DA) is playing.
decrease the amount of light reflected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should
become soiled, gently wipe it with a
soft cloth from the center of the CD to
the edge.
l
l
l
Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
l
l
Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
This unit can play MP3s with sampling
frequencies of 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
kHz.
This unit can play MP3 files that have
been recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to
320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insure
enjoyment of music with consistent
sound quality, it is recommended to use
discs that have been recorded at a bit
rate of 128 kbps or more.
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3 files, playback of the two file
types differs depending on how the
disc was recorded.
Packet written discs cannot be played
on this unit.
Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels, or
adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
l
qOperating tips for MP3
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a license
for private, non-commercial use and does not
convey a license nor imply any right to use this
product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such as
pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.
An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit
l
l
This unit does not play CDs recorded
using MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3
PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.
About folders and files
l
The order of hierarchy for MP3 files
and folders during playback or other
functions is from shallow to deep. The
arrangement and playing order of a
recorded disc containing MP3 files is
as follows:
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
l
This audio system handles MP3 files
l
File number
that have been recorded on CD-R/CD-
RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have been
recorded using the following formats
can be played:
A numerical file number is assigned
to each file in a folder in the order of
hierarchy from shallow to deep.
l
Folder number
l
ISO 9660 level 1
ISO 9660 level 2
Joliet extended format
Romeo extended format
A numerical folder number is
assigned to each folder in the order
of hierarchy from shallow to deep.
l
l
l
l
NOTE
This unit handles MP3 files
Folders and tracks (files) within the same
hierarchy play in the order they were written to
the disc depending on the write software.
conforming to the MP3 format
containing both header frames and data
frames.
l
This unit can play multi-session
recorded discs that have up to 40
sessions.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
The maximum number of characters
that can be used for file names is as
follows. However, this unit will only
display up to 32 characters, including
the file extension (.mp3).
Folder
No.
: Folder : Track (File)
01
02
03
04
05
Maximum number of
characters in a file name
(including a separator “.”
and the three letters of the
file extension)
3
2
4
ISO9660 level 1
ISO9660 level 2
12*
31*
Joliet extended
format
06
64
5
1
Romeo extended
format
128
* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and
underbar “_” are available.
Level1
Level3
Level2
Level4
CAUTION
Playback may not occur in the above
hierarchy depending on the audio unit.
This unit can only play MP3 files that
have an MP3 file extension (.mp3)
attached. Do not attach an MP3 file
extension to any other type file as it
could cause noise to be emitted or a
malfunction in the unit.
l
The folder order is automatically
assigned and this order cannot be
optionally set.
Any folder without an MP3 file will be
ignored. (It will be skipped and the
folder number will not be displayed.)
MP3 files not conforming to the MP3
format containing both header frames
and data frames will be skipped and
not played.
This unit will play MP3 files that have
up to eight levels. However, the more
levels a disc has, the longer it will take
to initially start playing. It is
recommended to record discs with two
levels or less.
l
l
About ID3 Tag display
l
This unit can only display ID3 Tag
album, track and artist names that have
been input using Ver.1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3
formats. Any other data that may have
been input cannot be displayed.
l
l
This unit can only display English
(including numerals) one-byte
characters. Use only English (including
numerals) one-byte characters when
inputting ID3 tags. Two-byte characters
and some special symbols cannot be
displayed.
l
l
A single disc with up to 512 files can
be played and a single folder with up to
255 files can be played.
When naming an MP3 file, be sure to
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after
the file name.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Specialized glossary
MP3
Bit rate
Refers to the volume of data per second,
expressed in bps (bits per second).
Generally, the larger the number of the
transfer bit rate when compressing an
MP3 file, the more information regarding
musical reproduction it carries, and
therefore the better the sound quality.
Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer 3”.
A technical standard for audio
compression as decided by an ISO
(International Organization for
Standardization) MPEG working group.
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be
compressed to approximately a tenth of
the source data size.
Packet writing
A general term for the method, similar to
that used for floppy discs or hard drives,
of recording the required file in a single
increment on a CD-R and similar.
ISO 9660
An international standard for logical
formatting of CD-ROM files and folders.
It is divided into three separate levels
based on differences in file naming
procedures, data configuration and other
characteristics.
ID3 Tag
ID3 tag is a method for storing
information related to the music in an
MP3 file. Information such as track, artist
and album name can be stored. This
content can be freely edited using ID3
editing function software.
Multi-session
A session is the complete amount of data
recorded from the beginning to the end of
a single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-
RW data recording. Multi-session refers to
the existence of data from two or more
sessions on a single disc.
VBR
Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. While
CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generally
used, VBR varies the bit rate for audio
compression according to compression
conditions and this allows for
Sampling
Refers to the process of encoding analog
audio data at regular intervals and
converting it to digital data. The sampling
rate refers to the number of times a
sample is taken in one second and is
expressed in Hz units. Increasing the
sampling rate improves the sound quality
but also increases the data size.
compression with preference given to
sound quality.
qOperating Tips for WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio
and is the audio compression format used
by Microsoft.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
* Microsoft and Windows Media are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation U.S. in the United States
and other countries.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Playable WMA file specification
CD-R and CD-RW including WMA files
can be played with this unit. Discs which
conform to the following formats can be
played.
Playable WMA files are as follows:
Item
Content
Windows Media
Audio Version 7.0,
8.0, 9.0
Specification
32kHz. . . . . . . 32, 40,
48 kbps
44.1kHz . . . . . 32, 48,
64, 80, 96, 128, 160,
192 kbps
Sampling
frequency
Bit rate
48kHz. . . . . . . 64, 96,
128, 160, 192 kbps
VBR (Variable Bit Rate)
Channel mode
Supported
Stereo/Monaural
Title, artist name,
album name
WMA tag
CAUTION
This unit plays files with the (.wma)
file extension as a WMA file. Do not
use the WMA file extension for files
other than WMA files. It may cause
noise or a malfunction.
l
l
l
In a WMA file, the track name, artist
name and album name are recorded
with data called “WMA-Tag”, and the
information can be displayed.
WMA files which do not comply with
the specific standard may not be played
correctly or its file and folder name
may not be displayed correctly.
The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings.
In this case, add the file extension
“.wma” to the end of the file name, and
then write the disc.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Audio Set
CD player
In-Dash CD Changer
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .............................................................. page 6-46
Operating the In-Dash CD Changer ....................................................................... page 6-50
Operating the Auxiliary jack .................................................................................. page 6-54
Error Indications ..................................................................................................... page 6-55
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qPower/Volume/Sound Controls
Audio control dial
Power/Volume dial
Power ON/OFF
Audio sound adjustment
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
1. Press the audio control dial to select the
function. The selected function will be
indicated.
Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
Press the power/volume dial again to turn
the audio system off.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the audio system on for a long
period of time when the engine is not running.
Volume adjustment
To adjust the volume, turn the power/
volume dial.
Turn the power/volume dial to the right to
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
*1 Depending on the mode selected, the
indication changes.
Standard audio-equipped model
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the
selected functions as follows:
Standard audio-equipped model
*1
Indication
Turn Left Turn Right
Select mode
Decrease
bass
Increase
bass
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
front
rear
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
Shift the
*1
left
OFF
12Hr
right
ON
24Hr
(Flashing) (Flashing)
Bose® Sound System-equipped model
Bose Sound System-equipped model
Indication
Turn Left Turn Right
OFF
ON
*1
Decrease
bass
Increase
bass
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
front
rear
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
left
OFF
12Hr
right
ON
*1
24Hr
(Flashing) (Flashing)
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
Turn the audio control dial to select ALC
OFF or ALC LEVEL1―7 modes. The
selected mode will be indicated.
About 5 seconds after selecting any mode, the
volume function will be automatically selected.
To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press
the audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unit
will beep and “CLEAR” will be displayed.
Automatic Level Control (ALC)
The automatic level control is a feature
that automatically adjusts audio volume
and sound quality according to the vehicle
speed.
The volume increases in accordance with
the increase in vehicle speed, and
decreases as vehicle speed decreases.
Select the desired ALC mode.
Mode
Volume change
No change
Minimum
*AudioPilot® 2 (Bose® Sound System-
equipped model)
Medium
AudioPilot® 2 automatically adjusts audio
volume and sound quality in accordance
with the level of noise entering the vehicle
interior while driving. When AudioPilot®
2 is turned on, the system automatically
calculates the conditions for optimum
hearing of sound which may be difficult
to hear depending on exterior noise.
Maximum
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
The system is also equipped to optimally
adjust the acoustic characteristics
automatically while the roof is open or
closed. The acoustic adjustment occurs
with the lock/unlock operation of the top
latch on the roof, and while the
adjustment is being done, the audio is
muted for about 1.5 sec, and then fades in.
* AudioPilot® 2 is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
BEEP setting
The beep-sound when operating the audio
system can be set on or off.
Time adjustment
Rotating the audio control dial switches
the display between 12 and 24-hour clock
time (page 6-30).
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qClock
Display
Hour set button
Audio control dial
Clock button
Minute set button
Setting the time
NOTE
l
When the clock button (
) is
The clock can be set at any time when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
released, the seconds are reset to “00”.
If the power supply to the unit is interrupted
(if the fuse blows or the vehicle's battery is
disconnected), the clock will need to be
reset.
l
1. To adjust the time, press the clock
button (
) for about 2 seconds
until a beep is heard.
The clock's current time will flash.
2. To advance the hours, press the hour
set button ( ). To advance the
minutes, press the minute set button
(
) while the time is flashing.
3. Press the clock button (
to start the clock.
) again
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Radio
Channel preset buttons Band selector button
Auto memory button
Display
Channel preset buttons
Scan button
Seek tuning buttons
Manual tuning dial
Radio ON
Tuning
Press a band selector button (
turn the radio on.
) to
The radio has the following tuning
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
on preset channels.
Band selection
Successively pressing the band selector
button ( ) switches the bands as
follows: FM1→FM2→AM.
NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows
or the battery is disconnected), the preset
channels will be erased.
The selected mode will be indicated. If
FM stereo is being received, “ST” will be
displayed.
Manual tuning
NOTE
Turning the manual tuning dial will
change the frequency higher or lower.
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,
reception automatically changes from
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the
“ST” indicator will go out.
Seek tuning
Pressing the seek tuning button (
,
)
will cause the tuner to seek a higher or
lower frequency automatically.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
Press and hold the auto memory button
If you continue to press and hold the button,
the frequency will continue changing without
stopping.
(
) for about 2 seconds until a beep
sound is heard; the system will
automatically scan and temporarily store
up to 6 stations with the strongest
frequencies in each selected band in that
area.
Scan tuning
Press the scan button (
) to
automatically sample strong stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about 5
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan
After scanning is completed, the station
with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed.
button (
) again during this interval.
Press and release the auto memory button
Preset channel tuning
(
) to recall stations from the auto-
stored stations. One stored station will be
selected each time; its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
6 AM and 12 FM stations.
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.
NOTE
If no stations can be tuned after scanning
operations, “A” will be displayed.
2. Depress a channel preset button for
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is
heard. The preset channel number and
station frequency will be displayed.
The station is now held in the memory.
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select AM,
FM1, or FM2 and then press its
channel preset button. The station
frequency and the channel number will
be displayed.
NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows
or the battery is disconnected), the preset
channels will be erased.
Auto memory tuning
This is especially useful when driving in
an area where the local stations are not
known. Additional AM/FM stations can
be stored without disturbing the
previously set channels.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Satellite Radioí
Channel preset buttons
Satellite button Electronic serial number button Channel preset buttons
Instant replay button Display
Band selector button
Text button
Category buttons
Scan button
Seek tuning buttons
Manual tuning dial
Information display
All operations of the satellite radio are displayed on the Information display.
Channel number, Channel name, Category name, Artist name, Song title,
ID code, Preset channel number, Bank number, Error signs
6-34
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
What is satellite radio?
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
- Increase the separation between the
equipment and tuner.
SIRIUS is radio the way it was meant to
be: More than 100 new channels of digital
quality programming delivered to listeners
coast to coast via satellite. That means
channels of completely commercial-free
music plus more channels of news, sports,
and entertainment from names like
CNBC, Discovery, SCI-FI Channel, A&E,
House of Blues, E!, NPR, Speed vision
and ESPN.
SIRIUS is live, dynamic entertainment,
completely focused on listeners. Every
minute of every day of every week will be
different. All commercial-free music
channels are created in-house and hosted
by DJs who know and love the music. Do
you like Reggae? How about Classic
Rock or New Rock? SIRIUS has an array
of choices spanning a vast range of
musical tastes including the hits of the
50's, 60's, 70's, & 80's as well as Jazz,
Country, Blues, Pop, Rap, R&B,
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the tuner is
connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
Bluegrass, Alternative, Classical, Heavy
Metal, Dance and many others.
From its state-of-the-art, digital
broadcasting facility in Rockefeller
Center, New York City, SIRIUS will
deliver the broadest, deepest mix of radio
entertainment from coast to coast.
SIRIUS will bring you music and
entertainment programming that is simply
not available on traditional radio in any
market across the country. It's radio like
you've never heard before.
Sign up for SIRIUS Radio today! For
more information, visit siriusradio.com.
Satellite radio can be subscribed to and
received in the United States. (Except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
How to subscribe to satellite radio
When you call the SIRIUS Customers
Care number you have two options
available.
(1) The full package which allows you
access to all SIRIUS content except
pay- per-view.
(2) The family package which allows
access to certain channels. Please see
the website: www.sirius.com for
details.
Please have the following information
ready when attempting to activate your
service:
Once the system is installed you must first
subscribe to the SIRIUS Radio service to
activate the system.
The SIRIUS Radio service uses an ID
code to identify your radio. This code is
needed to subscribe to SIRIUS Radio, and
if needed, is also used to report any
problems should there be any in the
future. Listeners can subscribe using any
of the following methods:
l
Visiting SIRIUS on the web at
www.sirius.com
Subscribing to SIRIUS customer care,
l
SIRIUS ID (ESN*)
Valid credit card information (type,
l
l
available 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week.
Calling (888) 539-7474
number, expiration date)
When you are ready to receive the on-air
activation signals you will be instructed
(for activation via phone) to turn on your
tuner, have the antenna pointed skyward,
and to set the channel to channel 184.
Once the signal is sent from the national
studio it may take up to ten minutes to be
received by your unit.
l
l
E-mail at: customercare@sirius-
radio.com
Writing to: SATELLITE RADIO
l
1221 Avenue of the Americas
New York, NY 10020
Attention: Customer Care
Customers should have their SIRIUS
Radio ID Electronic Serial Number
(ESN#) ready.
NOTE
On-air activation is completed after the
procedure, in most cases from ten seconds to
ten minutes.
NOTE
Your ESN# should have been recorded at the
time of installation. If not, press the ESN
button for 1.5 seconds or longer to display the
12-digit ESN for the SIRIUS tuner.
* ESN: Electronic Serial Number
SIRIUS operation
All operations of the satellite radio are
conducted by means of the audio unit.
Satellite radio activation
For activation and subscription
SIRIUS radio mode selection
information call toll-free at 1-888-539-
SIRI (7474). A SIRIUS Customer Care
representative will take the necessary
information and walk you through the
activation process. Or you can visit
SIRIUS online at WWW.siriusradio.com
and click on the “Join” button.
When the satellite button is pressed during
ACC ON, it will play the last SIRIUS
channel in use before the mode was
switched over to another mode or the
power was turned off.
When the satellite button is pressed in a
mode other than the SIRIUS mode, the
last channel in use will be received.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Every time the satellite button is pressed,
the bank changes in the order shown
below.
When the SIRIUS mode is switched to
another mode, or when the power is
turned off, the present channel which is
being received is stored as the last
channel.
Channel selection
SR1
SR2
SR3
Turning the manual tuning dial allows you
to select the desired receiving channel.
l
Turn the knob clockwise: Channel Up
l
Turn the knob counterclockwise:
Channel Down
Unsubscribed channel
When a selected station has not been
subscribed to, the display indicates the
following:
NOTE
SR1, SR2 and SR3: six stations can be stored
in each bank for convenient access to your
favorite stations.
[CALL
888] and [539
SIRI]
(Flashes alternately)
NOTE
Operation in the initial state
When the subscription contract is canceled, all
of the channels including channel 184 appear
as unsubscribed.
It may take some time to start up the
equipment when it is in the initial state,
when there is a change in the user's
subscription condition, or when the
SIRIUS channel map is changed.
“UPDATING xx%” is displayed when the
SIRIUS channel map is changed. If the
unit is initialized or the user contract
content is changed, “UPDATING” is
displayed. Updating could take as long as
three minutes depending on the
Invalid channel
When a selected channel is not
broadcasting, [SR
INVALID] is displayed for one second,
followed by [SR (bank number)
CHANNEL], which is also displayed for
one second. The display then returns to
the previous valid channel.
(bank number)
geographical area. When the unit is in an
initialized state, channel 184 is displayed
after the display indicates
“UPDATING 100%”. If the SIRIUS
channel map or the user contract content
is changed, the channel prior to the
change is displayed after “UPDATING” is
displayed. After the initialization display,
it may take as long as 12 seconds to
receive channel 184.
NOTE
If the last channel selected has become
unavailable because of a channel update the
above indication is displayed until any button
is pressed.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Preset channel programming
NOTE
Six stations can be stored in each bank, SR1,
SR2, and SR3 for convenient access to your
favorite stations.
(Programming with “channel number”
display)
1. Select the desired channel to be
programmed. At this point, the
following is displayed:
Preset channel call-up
Press and release the channel preset
button,
[SR
(bank number)
(channel
number)]
[SR
(bank number)
CH
(preset
number)
(channel number)] appears.
2. Keep pressing the channel preset
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
When the preset button is pressed during
text mode, its channel number is
displayed first for three second and then
its text is displayed.
The programming process is complete
after the channel number flashes. Then,
[SR
(bank number)] is displayed
and a beep sound is heard at the same
time.
NOTE
In the initial setting, all channels are preset to
184.
3. [SR
(preset number)
are displayed.
(bank number)
CH
(channel number)]
Category change
Press the category button (UP or DOWN)
and select the desired category.
(Programming with “text” display (e.g.
channel name))
l
Press the category button (UP):
Category up
Press the category button (DOWN):
Category down
1. Select the desired channel to be
programmed. At this point, the
following is displayed:
l
Every time the category (UP) button is
pressed for 1.5 second or less, the
category is changed over in the order
shown below.
At this time, the lowest (smallest-number)
channel within the category indicated is
received.
[SR
(bank number)
(selected
text (e.g. channel name))]
2. Keep pressing the channel preset
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
The programming process is complete
after the text (e.g. channel name)
When the highest (or lowest) category is
reached, the category is changed over in
the order shown below.
flashes. Then, [SR
is displayed and you will hear beep
sound at the same time.
(bank number)]
Highest category → Category all →
Lowest category
3. SR
(preset number)
are displayed.
(bank number)
CH
(channel number)]
NOTE
While in “CATEGORY ALL” mode, all
channels covering a category can be accessed
(Category off condition).
4. Three seconds later, it returns to normal
display. [SR (bank number) (text
(e.g. channel name))]
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Channel selection within a category
(Channel number display)
l
When the text button is pressed while
in info display mode, the mode
changes to the channel number display
mode.
If category is not in “ALL” and the
channel number is displayed, turning the
manual tuning dial moves the channel
number up/down in the present category.
l
Turn the manual tuning dial clockwise:
(Channel name display)
Channel Up
Turn the manual tuning dial
l
When the text button is pressed while
l
in channel number display mode, it
changes to channel name display
mode.
counterclockwise: Channel Down
NOTE
The channel number needs to be indicated in
the display to use manual tuning dial for this
function.
l
l
There are short (eight fixed characters)
and long names for the channel name.
The long name is displayed first, and
three seconds later the short name is
displayed. If there is no short name, the
long name is displayed.
To display the rest of the characters of
the channel name, press and hold the
text button (TEXT). The display scrolls
the next ten characters. Press and hold
the text button (TEXT) again after the
last ten characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
Press and hold the text button while the
short name is displayed to switch the
display to the long name.
Channel number, channel name,
category, artist, song titles and info
display
l
Each time the text button is pressed
during SIRIUS reception, the display of
the text data is changed over in the order
shown below.
l
l
Channel number
Song title
Channel name
Three seconds after scrolling the long
name, the display automatically returns
to the first part of the long name. Three
more seconds and the short name
appears.
Category
name
Info
Artist name
l
If there is no channel name,
“NO TITLE” is displayed.
NOTE
(Category name display)
l
Ten characters are displayed on one screen.
To display the rest of the characters of a
long title, press and hold the text button
l
When the text button is pressed while
l
in channel name display mode, it
changes to the category name display
mode.
(
). The display scrolls the next ten
characters. Press and hold the text button
) again after the last ten
l
There are short (eight fixed characters)
(
and long names for the category name.
characters have been displayed to return to
the beginning of the title.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
The long name is displayed first, and
(Song title display)
l
three seconds later the short name is
displayed. If there is no short name, the
long name is displayed.
When the text button is pressed while
in artist name display mode, it changes
to the song title display mode.
To display the rest of the characters of
l
l
To display the rest of the characters of
the category name, press and hold the
text button (TEXT). The display scrolls
the next ten characters. Press and hold
the text button (TEXT) again after the
last ten characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
the song title, press and hold the text
button (TEXT). The display scrolls the
next ten characters. Press and hold the
text button (TEXT) again after the last
ten characters have been displayed to
return to the beginning of the title.
l
l
Press and hold the text button while the
Three more seconds after scrolling the
short name is displayed to switch the
display to the long name.
Three seconds after scrolling the long
name, the display automatically returns
to display the first part of the long
name. Three more seconds and the
short name appears.
song title, the display automatically
returns to display the first part of the
song title.
If there is no song title, “NO SONG” is
displayed.
l
l
(INFO (such as composer's name)
display)
l
If there is no category name,
“NO CATEGORY” is displayed.
l
When the text button is pressed while
in song title display mode, it changes to
the INFO display mode.
To display the rest of the characters of
(Artist name display)
l
l
When the text button is pressed while
in category name display mode, it
changes to the artist name display
mode.
the composer's name, press and hold
the text button (TEXT). The display
scrolls the next ten characters. Press
and hold the text button (TEXT) again
after the last ten characters have been
displayed to return to the beginning of
the title.
Three seconds after scrolling the text,
the display automatically returns to
display the first part of the text.
l
To display the rest of the characters of
the artist's name, press and hold the
text button (TEXT). The display scrolls
the next ten characters. Press and hold
the text button (TEXT) again after the
last ten characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
l
l
l
Three seconds after scrolling the artist
If there is no composer name,
name, the display automatically return
to display the first part of the artist's
name.
If there is no artist's name,
“NO ARTIST” is displayed.
“NO INFO” is displayed.
Instant replay
l
This function allows you to rewind and
replay the program that you were
previously or are currently listening to.
Press the instant replay button ( ).
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed (about 1.5 seconds), playback
starts from the beginning of the current
program.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed twice, playback starts from the
beginning of the previous program.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed for about 1.5 seconds or longer,
the program is reversed while the button
is being pressed.
Displaying the SIRIUS ID (ESN)
When the ESN button is pressed for 1.5
seconds or longer, a 12-digit Electronic
Serial Number (ESN) for the SIRIUS
tuner is displayed.
(If the SIRIUS ID (ESN) for the tuner
does not display)
If “ESN
FAIL” is displayed after
pressing the ESN button for 1.5 seconds
or longer, contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed (about 1.5 seconds), playback
starts from the beginning of the next
program. When the seek tuning button
Initialization of ID code
If the registered ID code is forgotten,
return the ID code to the default [0000] by
performing the following steps:
(
) is pressed (about 1.5 seconds) while
the last program is being played, the
instant replay mode is cancelled.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed for 1.5 seconds or longer, the
program is fast-forwarded while the
button is being pressed. When pressing
and holding the button until the end of the
program, the instant replay mode is
cancelled.
Setting condition: SAT mode
(Master code input preparation)
1. Hold the scan button, then press
channel preset button 4, hold both
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.
2. “ENTER PIN” appears for three
seconds which indicates that it is in
code input mode.
When the instant replay button is pressed
again, playback is paused, or playback
starts if it has been paused.
3. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates
Instant replay (PAUSE)
that it is ready for code input.
If the instant replay button is pressed
while the instant replay mode is off,
instant replay mode is turned on in a
paused condition (PAUSE). Press the
instant replay button again to resume
playback from the point at which it was
paused.
(Master code input)
4. Input the master code using the channel
preset buttons 1-4.
(The master code is already set at the
time of factory shipment.)
NOTE
(Master code input determination)
l
If the channel is changed, the instant replay
buffer data is deleted.
5. Determine the master code which has
been input by pressing the scan button.
l
After turning on the power and switching to
SIRIUS digital satellite radio mode, the
instant replay mode is not available for
several seconds after changing channels.
6. “PIN CLEARED” appears which
indicates that the master code input has
been completed.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
7. The ID code is set to the default [0000]
and the initialization process is
completed.
3. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates
that it is ready for code input.
4. Input the registered ID code using
channel preset buttons 1-4.
NOTE
Master code:
Example: When the registered ID code
is “2323”, input “2323”. At this time
“SR1 2323” is displayed.
Press 1 for the first digit, 2 for the
second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the
last digit. For example, if your number
is 2323, press 1 three times, 2 four
times, 3 three, and 4 four times. If the
display goes off while inputting, begin
from Step 1.
The Master Code is used to initialize or re-
initialize the ID code in the event that the code
is not set to [0000] and/or the personalized ID
code is not known. The initialization process
resets the ID code to [0000]. The master code
can potentially defeat the intent of the security
of the parental lock if it is located by persons
not authorized by the owner to access certain
channels.
NOTE
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Master Code: [0913]
The registered ID code is the default [0000] at
the time of factory shipment. If [0000] results
in “Err” on the display, go to the
“INITIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section to
reset to [0000].
NOTE
l
When a numeric value other than the
master code is input and the scan button is
pressed, “SR1 Err” is displayed and then it
returns to the “SR1 - - - -” display again.
(Verification with the registered ID
code)
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
5. Determine the input code by pressing
the scan button.
l
scan button are used for inputting the ID
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.
6. If it does not match with the previously
registered code, “SR1 Err” is displayed
and then it returns to “SR1 - - - -”.
Change of ID code
Setting condition: SAT mode
When changing the ID code, the new ID
code is input after the previous one is
input first.
7. If it matches with the previously
registered code, “ENTER PIN” appears
again and it switches to code input
mode.
8. “SR1 - - - -” appears, and it is ready for
(Registered ID code input)
input of the new ID code.
1. Hold the scan button, then press
channel preset button 5, hold both
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.
(New ID code input)
9. Input the new ID code using channel
preset buttons 1-4.
2. “ENTER PIN” appears for three
seconds which indicates that it is in
code input mode.
Example: If “1234” is input as the new
code, “SR1 1234” is displayed.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
(New ID code input determination)
(Registered ID code input)
10. Determine the new ID code which
has been input by pressing the scan
button.
5. Input the registered ID code using
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example: If
the registered ID code is “2323”, input
“2323”. At this time “SR1 2323” is
displayed.
11. “PIN CHANGED” appears for three
seconds which indicates that the new
ID code input has been completed.
(Registered ID code input
determination)
12. It returns to the former display.
6. Determine the code which has been
input by pressing the scan button.
NOTE
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
7. If it does not match the registered code,
“SR1 Err” is displayed and then it
returns to “SR1 - - - -”.
l
scan button are used for input of the ID
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.
8. If it matches the registered code,
“SR1 LOCK” appears for three
seconds which indicates that the code
input has been completed.
Individual channel locking
If a channel is locked, the channel is
muted.
9. “SR1 LOCK 100” appears which
indicates that the parental lock is
activated. At this time, mute is on and
no sound is heard.
NOTE
If the registered ID code is forgotten, return
the ID code to the default [0000]. (See
“INTIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section)
NOTE
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
(Locking a channel)
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
scan button are used for input of the ID
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.
1. Select a channel to be locked by
turning the manual tuning dial.
Example: Select channel 100
l
(Registered ID code input preparation)
Lock cancellation
2. Hold the scan button, then press
channel preset button 6, hold both
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.
Setting condition: SAT mode
(Releasing a locked channel)
3. “ENTER PIN” appears for three
seconds which indicates that it is in
code input mode.
1. Select a channel to be released by
turning the manual tuning dial.
Example: Select the locked channel
(i.e. 100). At this time,
4. “SR1 - - - -” appears which indicates
that it is ready for code input.
“SR1 LOCK 100” is displayed.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
(Registered ID code input preparation)
NOTE
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
scan button are used for input of the ID
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.
2. Hold the scan button, then press
channel preset button 6, hold both
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.
l
3. “ENTER PIN” appears for three
seconds which indicates that it is in
code input mode.
Error signs
4. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates
(1) Depending on the surrounding
conditions (such as large trees,
buildings, or tunnels) and special
weather conditions, the reception of
SIRIUS radio waves may be
decreased or temporarily interrupted.
“ACQUIRING” may appear.
(2) In case of an antenna malfunction,
“ANTENNA FAIL” is displayed.
Check the satellite radio antenna,
antenna cable and DLP antenna
connector.
that it is ready for code input.
(Registered ID code input)
5. Input the registered ID code using
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example:
When the registered ID code is “2323”,
input “2323”. At this time “SR1 2323”
is displayed.
NOTE
If “Err” is displayed, go to the
“INITIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section to
reset the ID code to [0000].
NOTE
If a broken DLP* unit is replaced with a new
unit, cancel the license for the broken unit and
make sure to carry out new registration for the
replaced unit. If the license for the broken unit
is not canceled, you will be charged a
reception fee for both units.
(Registered ID code input
determination)
6. Determine the input code by pressing
the scan button.
7. If it does not match the registered code,
“SR1 Err” is displayed and then it
returns to “SR1 - - - -”.
* DLP: Down Link Processor
(SATELLITE RADIO Module)
8. If it matches the registered code,
“SR1 UNLOCK” appears for three
seconds which indicates that the code
input has been completed.
9. “SR1 100” appears which indicates that
the parental lock is off. At this time,
sound is heard.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
CD slot
CD play button
Folder up button
CD eject button
Display
Repeat button
Play/Pause button
Scan button
Folder down button
Text button
Load button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
Random button
Type
Playable data
Ejecting the CD
Music/MP3/WMA CD · Music data (CD-DA)
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
player
· MP3/WMA file
NOTE
Playback
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and
MP3/WMA files, playback of the two or three
file types differs depending on how the disc
was recorded.
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit.
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”
will flash on and off.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
When the load button (
CD will load and play even if the CD eject
button ( ) had been previously pressed.
) is pressed, the
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play begins
while the player reads the digital signals on
the CD.
Pause
To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button ( ).
Press the button again to resume
playback.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Fast-forward/Reverse
During MP3/WMA CD playback
Press and hold the fast-forward button
(Track repeat)
(
) to advance through a track at high
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
speed.
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. After “TRACK RPT” is
displayed, “RPT” is displayed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
Track search
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
(Folder repeat)
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
After “FOLDER RPT” is displayed,
“F-RPT” is displayed.
Folder search (during MP3/WMA CD
playback)
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button (
folder up button (
next folder.
), or press the
) to advance to the
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Music scan
Random playback
This feature helps to find a program by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
During music CD playback
1. Press the random button (
) during
Press the scan button (
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
Press the scan button (
cancel scan playback.
) during
playback to play the tracks on the CD
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
) again to
During MP3/WMA CD playback
(Folder random)
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
1. Press the random button (
) during
Repeat playback
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. After “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed, “RDM” is displayed.
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
(CD random)
MP3/WMA CD
1. Press the random button (
) during
File number/Elapsed time
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly. After
“DISC RDM” is displayed, “D-RDM”
is displayed.
Folder number/File number
File name
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Switching the display
Folder name
For files with a file name or other name
that have been input, the display changes
in the order of the file names or other
names each time the text button (
is pressed during playback.
Music CD
Album name (ID3 Tag)
Song name (ID3 Tag)
Artist name (ID3 Tag)
)
Track number/Elapsed time
Track name
Album name
Artist name
NOTE
(MP3/WMA CD)
This unit can only read English (including
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on
the CD writing software used, proper display
may not be possible.
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, press and hold
the text button (
scrolls the next 13 characters. Press and
hold the text button ( ) again after
). The display
the last 13 characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
NOTE
The displayable number of characters is
limited. If the number of characters, including
the file extension (.mp3/.wma), exceeds 32
characters, it may not be fully displayed.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the In-Dash CD Changer
Channel preset buttons
Load button
CD slot
CD play button
Display
Repeat button
CD eject button
Disc up/Folder up button
Text button
Play/Pause button
Track up/Fast-forward button
Random button
Channel
preset buttons
Scan button
Track down/Reverse button
Disc down/Folder down button
Type
Playable data
NOTE
The CD will begin playback automatically
after insertion.
Music/MP3/WMA CD ·Music data (CD-DA)
player
·MP3/WMA file
A CD cannot be inserted while the display
reads “WAIT”. A beeping sound can be heard
during this waiting time.
There will be a short lapse before play begins
while the player reads the digital signals on
the CD.
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and
MP3/WMA files, playback of the two or three
file types differs depending on how the disc
was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Normal insertion
The CD must be label-side up when
inserting. The auto-loading mechanism
will set the CD and begin play.
1. Press the load button (
).
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
Inserting CDs into desired tray number
1. Press and hold the load button (
)
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
2. Press the channel preset button for the
desired tray number while “WAIT” is
displayed.
2. Press the channel preset button for the
desired CD number for less than 5
seconds after the beep sound is heard.
3. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
3. Pull out the CD.
NOTE
Multiple ejection
The CD cannot be inserted to the desired tray
number if the number is already occupied.
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
)
Multiple insertion
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.
1. Press and hold the load button (
)
2. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will
be ejected.
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
NOTE
l
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
CDs will be ejected starting with the one
with the lowest number.
All CDs in the tray will be ejected
3. When “IN” is displayed again, insert
the next CD.
l
continuously.
CDs can be ejected when the ignition
switch is off. Press and hold the CD eject
button ( ) for about 2 seconds and all
CDs will eject.
NOTE
l
The first-inserted CD will be played
automatically when:
l
No other CD is inserted within 15 seconds
after “IN” is displayed.
l
The CD trays are full.
Playback
Ejecting the CD
Normal ejection
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit.
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”
will flash on and off.
1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The
disc number and “DISC OUT” will be
displayed.
Pause
2. Pull out the CD.
To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button ( ).
Press the button again to resume
playback.
NOTE
When the CD is ejected during play, the next
CD will be played automatically.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Ejecting CDs from desired tray number
Press and hold the fast-forward button
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
)
(
) to advance through a track at high
speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Track search
Repeat playback
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Disc search
During music CD playback
During MP3/WMA CD playback
(Track repeat)
To change the disc, press the DISC button
(
or
) during playback.
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
During MP3/WMA CD playback
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. After “TRACK RPT” is
displayed, “RPT” is displayed.
To change the disc, press the DISC button
(
or
) for 1.5 seconds or more
during playback.
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
Folder search (during MP3/WMA CD
playback)
(Folder repeat)
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button (
seconds, or press the folder up button
) for less than 1.5 seconds to advance
) for less than 1.5
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
After “FOLDER RPT” is displayed,
“F-RPT” is displayed.
(
to the next folder.
Music scan
This feature helps to find a program by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Press the scan button (
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
Press the scan button (
cancel scan playback.
) during
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
During music CD playback
) again to
1. Press the random button (
) during
playback to play the tracks in the CD
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
resume where scan was selected.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
During MP3/WMA CD playback
(Folder random)
MP3/WMA CD
Disc number/File
number/Elapsed time
1. Press the random button (
) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. After “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed, “RDM” is displayed.
Disc number/Folder
number/File number
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
File name
(CD random)
1. Press the random button (
) during
Folder name
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly. After
“DISC RDM” is displayed, “D-RDM”
is displayed.
Album name (ID3 Tag)
Song name (ID3 Tag)
Artist name (ID3 Tag)
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Switching the display
For files with a file name or other name
that have been input, the display changes
in the order of the file names or other
NOTE
(MP3/WMA CD)
This unit can only read English (including
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on
the CD writing software used, proper display
may not be possible.
names each time the text button (
is pressed during playback.
Music CD
)
Display scroll
Disc number/Track
Only 13 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, press and hold
number/Elapsed time
Track name
Album name
Artist name
the text button (
scrolls the next 13 characters. Press and
hold the text button ( ) again after
). The display
the last 13 characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
NOTE
The displayable number of characters is
limited. If the number of characters, including
the file extension (.mp3/.wma), exceeds 32
characters, it may not be fully displayed.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
qOperating the Auxiliary jack
similar products on the market to the
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio
over the vehicle's speakers, refer to
Auxiliary Input (page 6-58).
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qError Indications
If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication
Cause
Solution
Insert the CD properly. If the error indication
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer
CD is inserted upside down
CHECK CD
Insert another CD properly. If the error indication
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer
CD is defective
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
Audio Control Switch
Operationí
l
The voice recognition/hands-free switch is
operable with the audio unit turned off.
Mazda has installed this system to prevent
distraction while driving the vehicle and
using audio controls on the dashboard.
Always make safe driving your first priority.
l
When the audio unit is turned on,
operation of the audio unit from the
steering wheel is possible.
NOTE
qAdjusting the Volume
Because the audio unit will be turned off under
the following conditions, the switches will be
inoperable.
To increase the volume, pull up the
volume switch.
l
When the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
When the power button on the audio unit is
pressed and the audio unit is turned off.
To decrease the volume, press down the
volume switch.
l
l
When the CD being played is ejected and
the audio unit is turned off.
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free
With Bluetooth Hands-Free
Voice recognition/hands-free switch
6-56
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qChanging the Source
qSeek Switch
Press the mode switch (
) to change
the audio source (FM1 radio> FM2 radio>
AM radio> CD player or CD changer>
SIRIUS1> SIRIUS2> SIRIUS3> AUX>
cyclical).
When listening to the radio or SIRIUS
digital satellite radio
Pull up or press down the seek switch, the
radio switches to the next/previous stored
station in the order that it was stored
(1―6).
NOTE
CD, CD changer, and SIRIUS digital satellite
radio modes cannot be selected in the
following cases:
· SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit is not
equipped on the audio system.
Pull up or press down the seek switch for
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is
heard to seek all usable stations at a
higher or lower frequency whether
programmed or not.
· CD has not been inserted.
· With the SIRIUS digital satellite radio, the
mode which was selected last is displayed.
product on the market to the auxiliary jack to
listen to music or audio over the vehicle's
speakers. Change the audio source to AUX
mode (page 6-58).
When playing a CD
Pull up the seek switch to skip to the next
track.
Press down the seek switch to repeat the
current track.
Pull up or press down and hold the seek
switch to continuously switch the tracks
up or down.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qMute Switchí
AUX Mode (Auxiliary input)
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute
audio, press it again to resume audio
output.
You can connect portable audio units or
similar products on the market to the
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio
over the vehicle's speakers.
NOTE
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position with the audio muted, the mute will be
canceled.
Therefore, when the engine is restarted, the
audio is not muted. To mute the audio again,
press the mute switch ( ).
Auxiliary jack
WARNING
Do not adjust the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving the
vehicle:
Adjusting the portable audio unit or
a similar product while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident. Always adjust the
portable audio unit or a similar
product while the vehicle is stopped.
Do not allow the connection plug cord
to get tangled with the parking brake
or the shift lever:
Allowing the plug cord to become
tangled with the parking brake or
the shift lever is dangerous as it
could interfere with driving, resulting
in an accident.
6-58
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
4. Press the AUX button (
audio unit or the mode switch (
of the audio control switches on the
) of the
CAUTION
)
Noise may occur during playback if
the accessory socket equipped on the
vehicle is used. (If noise occurs, do
not use the accessory socket.)
steering wheel to change to the AUX
mode.
Audio Unit
Audio Control
Switches
NOTE
l
Before using the auxiliary jack, read the
manufacturer's instructions for the product
being connected.
l
Use a commercially-available, non-
impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for
connecting the portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliary
jack, read the manufacture's instructions
for connecting a portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
NOTE
l
l
To prevent discharging of the battery, do
not use the auxiliary input for long periods
with the engine off or idling.
Set the volume of the portable audio unit to
the maximum within the range that the
sound does not become distorted, then
adjust the volume using the power/volume
dial of the audio unit or the volume switch
l
l
Noise may occur depending on the product
connected to the auxiliary jack.
With regard to connecting a portable audio
or similar device to a power source, use the
battery for the device, not the accessory
socket.
Insert the plug to the auxiliary jack
securely.
Insert or remove the plug with the plug
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack hole.
Insert or remove the plug by holding its
base.
(
,
) of the audio control switch.
l
l
Use your portable audio unit for operations
other than volume adjustment.
If the connection plug is pulled out from the
auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise
may occur.
l
l
l
To listen to a portable audio unit
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
2. Insert the connection plug into the
auxiliary jack.
3. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Safety Certification
This CD player is made and tested to meet exacting safety standards. It meets FCC
requirements and complies with safety performance standards of the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services.
CAUTION
Ø This CD player should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except qualified
service personnel.
If servicing is required, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure. Never operate the CD
player with the top case of the unit removed.
Ø Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
NOTE
For CD player section:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Bluetooth Hands-Freeí
CAUTION
The types of mobile phones which
can be connected to the hands-free
unit are limited, so before purchasing
or changing your mobile phone
model, consult Mazda Bluetooth
Hands-Free Customer Service or visit
www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth for a
complete list of compatible phones.
Mobile phones which can be
qWhat is Bluetooth Hands-Free?
Bluetooth Hands-Free Outline
By connecting a Bluetooth equipped
mobile telephone to the hands-free unit
equipped on the vehicle, making and
receiving calls are possible using the
voice recognition/hands-free switch
located on the steering wheel, and saying
the voice commands.
connected to the hands-free system
need to be compliant with Bluetooth
specifications and the appropriate
profile, however, even among these
Bluetooth phones are some which
will not connect with your Mazda or
will have limited function. Therefore,
consult Mazda Bluetooth Hands-Free
Customer Service for information
regarding mobile phone
WARNING
Perform phonebook registration related
operations while the vehicle is parked:
Performing phonebook registration
while driving the vehicle could be a
distraction to your driving and result
in an unexpected accident. In
addition, a mistake in performing the
phonebook operation could result in
the loss of important data.
compatibility:
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/
bluetooth
Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone
Applicable Bluetooth specification
Ver. 1.1 or higher
Response profile
A Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone
communicates with the hands-free unit
equipped on the vehicle using radio
transmission (Bluetooth).
For example, if the mobile telephone is
placed in a coat pocket, the phone calls
can be made through your mobile service
without taking out and handling the
mobile telephone.
l
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
DUN (Dial-up Networking Profile)
l
Ver. 1.1
Bluetooth is the registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-61
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
Voice Recognition/Hands-Free switch
operations
l
If the ignition switch is turned off during a
hands-free call, the line is transferred to the
mobile telephone automatically.
If the mobile telephone is in a location
where radio reception is difficult such as a
metal container or in the trunk, the call may
not be connected using Bluetooth. If
communication is not possible, change the
location of the mobile telephone.
A short press or a long press of the voice
recognition/hands-free switch is used to
operate the system as follows:
l
l
Short press (Press the button less than
0.7 sec.)
l
Long press (Press the button 0.7 sec. or
more.)
Information display
qComponent parts
When available, the information display
shows telephone numbers, Bluetooth
Hands-Free messages, and operation
status.
Bluetooth Hands-Free consists of the
following items:
l
Voice Recognition/Hands-Free switch
Information display
Microphone
Audio unit
l
l
l
Voice Recognition/Hands-Free switch
Basic functions of Bluetooth Hands-Free
can be used for such things as making
calls or hanging up using the voice
recognition/hands-free switch on the
steering wheel.
Microphone
The microphone is used for speaking
voice commands or exchanging
conversation.
Microphone
Voice recognition/hands-free switch
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
l
Audio unit
Dialects or different wording other than
hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specified by the voice
commands.
The audio unit is used for adjusting the
volume.
qVoice
Please be aware that the voice recognition
may error despite following the above
points.
To prevent the deterioration in voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points must be observed:
l
It is not necessary to face the
qFunction restrictions while using
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Some functions are limited while
Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used. They
include:
l
Close the windows and/or the
moonroof to reduce loud noises from
outside the vehicle, or turn down the
airflow of the climate control system
while Bluetooth Hands-Free is being
used. Voice recognition may not
function correctly or voice quality may
deteriorate under the following
conditions.
l
Beep sound and voice guidance related
to the audio unit are not heard.
Beep sound related to the A/C
operation is not heard.
l
qHow to use this section
Descriptions in the text are as follows:
Say: Voice commands to be spoken by
you.
Prompt: Voice guidance output from the
speaker.
l
A passenger is speaking.
Driving with the window and/or the
l
moonroof open.
Driving on bumpy roads.
Noise outside of the vehicle is loud.
l
l
NOTE
(Construction sites, inside tunnels,
excess oncoming traffic, or heavy
rain.)
Say voice commands after the beep sound
[Beep] is heard.
l
Operation noise from turn signals,
Example)
Say: [Beep] “Dial”
wipers, or the horn is heard.
A/C airflow is strong or wind is
l
Prompt: “Number, please”
Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”
blowing on the microphone.
There is noise coming from cargo
loaded in the vehicle.
l
l
Voice commands may not be
Bluetooth Hands-Free Activation
Method
recognized depending on the voice. If
the voice commands are not recognized
correctly, repeat the commands in a
louder voice, at a natural pace, as if
speaking to another person.
1. Program the mobile telephone (Pairing)
Refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free
preparation on page 6-64.
2. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
The hands-free system is activated.
Functions of the hands-free telephone,
such as making and receiving calls, can be
used after the activation. (For details on
the telephone functions, refer to “Basic
Bluetooth Hands-Free Operation” or
“Convenient Use of the Hands-Free
System”.)
Basic Bluetooth Hands-
Free Operation
q
Bluetooth Hands-Free preparation
Language setting
The available languages are English,
Spanish, and Canadian French. If the
language setting is changed, all of the
voice guidance and voice input
commands are done in the selected
language.
NOTE
l
If the language setting is changed, phone
registration is maintained.
Phonebook records are not cleared, but
each language has a separate phonebook.
Therefore, entries created in one language
will need to be re-entered in the phonebook
of the new language.
l
Do these steps before you start driving.
These less used functions are too
distracting to undertake while driving until
you are fully familiar with the system.
Method 1
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode, or
say “cancel” to return to the main
menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Language”
5. Prompt: “Select a language: English,
French, or Spanish.”
6. Say: [Beep] “French” (Speak the
desired language: “English”, “French”
or “Spanish”)
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
Up to seven Bluetooth equipped mobile
telephones can be programmed to the
vehicle.
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying the name
of the language in the native pronunciation.
NOTE
l
A mobile telephone can be programmed
7. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
only when the vehicle is parked. If the
vehicle starts to move, the pairing
procedure will end. Programming is
dangerous while driving - pair up your
device before you start driving. Park the
car in a safe place before programming.
selected. Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected, returning to main menu”
(Spoken in the newly selected
language).
l
Since the communication range of a
Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone is
about 10 meters (32 ft), if a mobile
Method 2
telephone is placed within a 10-meter (32
ft) radius of the vehicle, it may be detected/
programmed unintentionally while another
telephone is being programmed.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “French” (Say the desired
language: “English”, “French”, or
“Spanish”.)
1. Activate the Bluetooth application of
the mobile telephone.
NOTE
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying the name
of the language in the native pronunciation.
For the operation of the mobile telephone,
refer to its instruction manual.
2. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
3. Prompt: “Would you like to change
the language to French (Desired
language) ?”
3. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
4. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode, or
say “cancel” to return to the main
menu.”
5. Prompt: “Please wait. Switching to
French phone book. French selected,
returning to main menu” (Spoken in
the newly selected language).
5. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
Mobile telephone programming
(Pairing)
6. Prompt: “Do you want to pair a phone,
delete a phone, or list paired phones?”
To use Bluetooth Hands-Free, a mobile
phone equipped with Bluetooth has to be
programmed to the hands-free unit using
the following procedure.
7. Say: [Beep] “Pair a phone”
8. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit pairing
code.”
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
9. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Speak an
arbitrary 4-digit pairing code. This can
be any combination of 4 numbers.)
NOTE
Speak a programmed “phone tag” within 10
seconds.
If more than two mobile telephones are to be
programmed, they cannot be programmed with
the same or similar “phone tag”.
NOTE
l
Some devices accept only a particular
pairing code (Usually, “0000” or “1234”).
If pairing cannot be completed, refer to the
owner's manual of your mobile device, and
try those numbers if necessary.
19. Prompt: “Adding XXXXXX - - -
(Ex. “Stan's phone”) (Phone tag). Is
this correct?”
l
Record the code as it will be used to
20. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
program your phone in Step 16.
21. Prompt: “Assign a priority for this
phone between 1 and 7, where 1 is
the phone used most often.”
10. Prompt: “Pairing code XXXX (4-
digit number). Is this correct?”
11. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
22. Say: [Beep] “1” (Speak a number of
12. If “Yes”, go to Step 13.
the desired priority from 1 to 7.)
If “No”, the procedure returns to Step
8.
NOTE
l
Normally, “1” is to be input (Highest
13. Prompt: “Start pairing procedure on
phone. See phone's manual for
instructions.”
priority).
l
If more than two mobile telephones are
registered, input the priority order from 1 to
7.
14. Using the mobile telephone, perform
a search for the Bluetooth device
(Peripheral device).
23. Prompt: “XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
phone”) (Phone tag) set to priority X
(Priority number). Is this correct?”
NOTE
For the operation of the mobile telephone,
refer to its instruction manual.
24. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
25. Prompt: “Pairing complete”
15. Select “Mazda” from the device list
After a mobile telephone is registered, the
system automatically identifies the phone.
By pressing the voice recognition/hands-
free switch again, or by pressing the voice
recognition/hands-free switch first after
turning the ignition switch from the
LOCK to the ACC position, the system
reads out a voice guidance, “XXXXXX -
- - (Ex. “Stan's phone”) (Phone tag) is
connected”. If two or more telephones are
registered, the one with the highest
priority is selected.
searched by the mobile phone.
16. Input the 4-digit pairing code set in
Step 9 to the mobile telephone.
17. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
phone after the beep.”
18. Say: [Beep] “XXXX - - -” (Speak a
“phone tag”, an arbitrary name for the
phone.)
Example: “Stan's phone.”
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
qReceiving an incoming call
Depending on the device, the registration
status may be lost after a certain period of
time. If this occurs, repeat the entire process
from Step 1.
1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press the
phone button to answer”.
2. To accept the call, press the voice
recognition/hands-free switch with a
short press.
qMaking a call using a telephone
To reject the call, press the voice
recognition/hands-free switch with a
long press.
number
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confident you can do it while driving in a non-
taxing road situation. If you are not completely
comfortable, make all calls from a safe
parking position, and move out only when fully
under control and you can devote your eyes
and mind to driving.
qHanging up a call
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the call with a long press.
A beep sound will confirm that call is
ended.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
qVolume adjustment
The power/volume dial of the audio unit
is used to adjust the volume. Turn the dial
to the right to increase volume, to the left
to decrease it.
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “Dialing XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “555-1234”) (Telephone number)
is this correct?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
7. When “Yes” is spoken, the call is
made.
When “No” is spoken, the procedure
returns to Step 3.
NOTE
NOTE
l
The “Dial” command and a telephone number
The volume can also be adjusted using the
volume button on the steering wheel.
The music volume of the audio unit cannot
be adjusted while Bluetooth Hands-Free is
being used.
can be combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Dial 123-4567”, then,
Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
l
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
qHelp function use
Convenient Use of the
Hands-Free System
The help function informs the user of all
the available voice commands under the
current conditions.
qPhone book usage
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Phone book registration
Phone numbers can be registered to the
Bluetooth Hands-Free phone book.
2. Say: [Beep] “Help”
3. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance
instructions.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “New entry”
5. Prompt: “Name please.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
7. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice
tag). Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Pager?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Mobile” (Say “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Pager”, for the
desired location to be registered.)
11. Prompt: “Mobile” (Location to be
registered). Is this correct?
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
13. Prompt: “Number, please.”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
14. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “555-1234”)” (Say the phone
number to be registered.)
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Call” command and the voice tag can be
15. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-1234”) (Phone number
combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Call John's phone”, then,
Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
registration). Is this correct? ”
16. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
qRedialing function
17. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to add another number for this
entry?”
Redialing the number of the person
previously dialed using the phone is
possible.
18. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
19. If “Yes”, an additional phone number
registration can be made for the same
entry.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
If “No”, the procedure proceeds to
Step 20.
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
qEmergency calls
20. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
A call can be made to the emergency
phone number (911) using the voice input
command.
Making calls using the phone book
Telephone calls can be made by saying
phone number has been registered in
Bluetooth Hands-Free in advance.
For the phone book setting method, refer
to (page 6-70).
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”
3. Prompt: “Calling “911”, is this
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
correct?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
5. Prompt: “Dialing”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phone book.)
qRefusing an incoming call
For incoming call refusal, refer to
“Receiving an incoming call” (page 6-67).
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phone book).
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Call waiting
qMute
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
The microphone can be muted during a
call.
Call interrupt
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
A call can be switched to a new incoming
call.
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute”
3. Prompt: “Microphone muted”
Canceling mute
NOTE
l
To refuse an incoming call, press the voice
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
recognition/hands-free switch with a long
press.
l
After receiving a new incoming call, the
previous call is placed on hold.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute off”
3. Prompt: “Microphone unmuted”
Switching calls
qTransferring a call
Switching back to the previous call can
also be done.
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Transferring a call from Hands-Free to
a mobile phone
Communication between the hands-free
unit and a mobile phone is canceled, and
the line can be switched to a standard call
using a mobile phone.
Ending the current call
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the call with a long press.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
q
Voice guidance interrupt operation
Voice guidance can be stopped by
pressing the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press while it is being
heard. A new voice input command can
then be spoken by the user.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to phone”
Transferring a call from a mobile
phone to Hands-Free
· Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Communication between mobile phones
can be switched to the Bluetooth Hands-
Free system.
qPhone book settings
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Editing phone book
The data registered to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free phone book can be edited.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to Hands
Free system”
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
If there was no previous phone number
registered to a location (Ex. “Work”), the
prompt will only read out “Number, please”.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
12. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “666-1234”)” (Say the new
phone number to be registered.)
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
13. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“666-1234”) (The new phone number
to be registered). Is this correct?”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
14. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
4. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
15. Prompt: “Number changed. Would
you like to call this number, edit
another entry..., or say “cancel” to
return to main menu.”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to edit, or say
“List names”..., or say “cancel” to
return to main menu.”
Phone book data deletion
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say the voice tag for the
registered name to be edited in the
phone book.)
Erasing individual phone book data
Individual data registered to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free phone book can be cleared.
NOTE
7. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
Pager?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Home” (Say the
registered location to be edited:
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
“Pager”).
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX
(Ex. “Home”) (Registered location). Is
this correct?”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
4. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
11. Prompt: “The current number is
XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex. “555-1234”)
(Currently registered number). New
number, please.”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to delete, or say
“List names”..., or say “cancel” to
return to main menu.”
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say the registered voice tag
to be deleted from the phone book.)
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please wait, erasing the
Hands Free system phone book.”
7. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)
Home (Registered location). Is this
correct?”
10. Prompt: “Hands-Free system phone
book erased, returning to main
menu.”
Read-out of names registered to the
Bluetooth Hands-Free phone book
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) Home
(Registered location) deleted, returning
to main menu.”
The Bluetooth Hands-Free system can
read out the list of names registered to its
phone book.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Complete deletion of the phone book
data
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
All data registered to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free phone book can be erased.
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
4. Say: [Beep] “List names”
5. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone”, Mary's
phone, Bill's phone)” (Voice guidance
reads out the voice tags registered to
the phone book.)
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the read-out at the desired
name, and then say one of the following
voice commands to execute it.
4. Say: [Beep] “Erase all”
l
“Continue”: Continues the voice
5. Prompt: “Are you sure you want to
erase everything from your Hands Free
system phone book?”
guidance.
“Call”: Calls the registered phone
l
number.
l
“Edit”: Edits the registered phone
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
number.
7. Prompt: “You are about to delete
everything from your Hands Free
system phone book. Do you want to
continue?”
l
“Delete”: Deletes the registered phone
number.
l
“Previous”: Returns to the previous
phone number.
“Cancel”: Returns to main menu.
l
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
6. Prompt: “End of list, would you like
Hands-Free Telephone Setting
to start from the beginning?”
qMobile phone
7. Say: [Beep] “No”
Mobile phone registration
8. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
For the registration of a Bluetooth
equipped mobile telephone to Bluetooth
Hands-Free, refer to “Bluetooth Hands-
Free preparation” (page 6-64).
Registered mobile phone read-out
Bluetooth Hands-Free can read-out the
mobile phones registered to its system.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Do you want to pair a
phone, delete a phone, or list paired
phones?”
6. Say: [Beep] “List phones”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. Phone A, phone B,
phone C)” (The voice guidance reads
out the phone tags registered to the
hands-free system.)
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the read-out at the desired
phone, and then say one of the following
voice commands to execute it.
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)
(Registered phone tag) selected, is this
correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
l
“Select”: Programmed the mobile
phone when the voice recognition/
hands-free switch was pressed.
“Continue”: Continues the voice
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)
(Phone tag) will temporarily override
phone priorities, returning to main
menu.”
l
guidance.
l
“Delete”: Deletes the registered mobile
phone.
“Previous”: Returns to the previous
mobile phone.
Registered mobile phone deletion
l
Registered mobile phones can be deleted
individually or collectively.
NOTE
8. Prompt: “End of list, would you like
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
to start from the beginning?”
9. Say: [Beep] “No”
10. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
Mobile phone selection
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
This function is for switching to a
different mobile phone which has been
registered beforehand. The selected
mobile phone will remain in effect until
the ignition switch is turned off.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
5. Prompt: “Do you want to pair a
phone, delete a phone, or list paired
phones?”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
NOTE
A registered mobile phone can be deleted
using the registration list.
4. Say: [Beep] “Select phone”
6. Say: [Beep] “Delete phone”
5. Prompt: “Please say 1 (priority 1) for
XXXXX... (Ex. phone A), 2 (priority
2) for XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)”
7. Prompt: “Please say 1 (priority 1) for
XXXXX... (Ex. phone A), 2 (priority
2) for XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)”
(The voice guidance reads out each
phone in the order of priority and the
phone tag).
6. Say: [Beep] “2” (Say the priority
number for the mobile phone to be
used as first priority.)
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
8. Say: [Beep] “2” (Say the order of
priority of the mobile phone to be
deleted.)
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say a desired 4-
digit passcode, “PCode”.)
9. Prompt:“Passcode XXXX (Passcode,
NOTE
PCode). Is this correct?”
Say “All” to delete all mobile phones.
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Removing XXXXX... (Ex.
phone B...) (Registered phone tag). Is
this correct?”
11. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled,
returning to main menu.”
Using Bluetooth Hands-Free with a
passcode
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Deleted”
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
qSecurity setting
2. Prompt:“Hands-Free system is locked.
If a passcode is set, the system cannot be
activated unless the passcode is input.
State the passcode to continue.”
3. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say the set
NOTE
passcode “PCode”.)
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
4. If the correct passcode is input, voice
guidance “XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Phone tag) is connected” is
announced.
Passcode setting
If the passcode is incorrect, voice
guidance “XXXX (4-digit passcode,
Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try
again” is announced.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
Canceling the passcode
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
5. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled. Would
you like to enable it?”
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
7. Prompt:“Please say a 4-digit passcode.
Remember this passcode. It will be
required to use this system.”
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt:“Confirmation prompts are
on/off. Would you like to turn
5. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled. Would
confirmation prompts off/on?”
you like to disable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Confirmation prompts are
7. Prompt:“Passcode is disabled,
off/on, returning to main menu.”
returning to main menu.”
Confirmation Prompts
qVoice recognition learning
function (Speaker enrollment)
The confirmation prompt confirms the
command content to the user before
advancing to the operation requested by
the user. When this function is turned on,
the system reads out the voice input
command previously received and
confirms whether the command is correct
before advancing to the command
execution.
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned on:
(Ex. “Calling John's phone. Is this
correct?”)
The voice recognition learning function
enables voice recognition appropriate to
the characteristics of the user's voice.
If the recognition of the voice input
commands to the system is not adequate,
this function can largely improve the
system's voice recognition of the user. If
your voice can be recognized sufficiently
without using this function, you may not
realize the added benefit of the function.
command list must be read out. Read out
the list when the vehicle is parked.
Perform the registration in as quiet a place
as possible (page 6-63).
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned off:
(Ex. “Calling John's phone.”)
The registration must be performed
completely. The required time is a few
minutes. The user needs to be seated in
the driver's seat with the voice input
command list for voice recognition
learning open to the page indicated below.
NOTE
If the confirmation prompt function is turned
off when making an emergency call, the system
reads out and confirms the command before
executing it.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
3. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the phone
button when you are ready to begin.
Press and hold the phone button to
cancel at any time.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Confirmation prompts”
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
4. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
NOTE
After user voice registration is completed,
voice guidance “Speaker enrollment is
complete, returning to main menu” is
announced.
5. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
qDTMF (dual tone multi-
frequency signal) transmission
6. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say the
voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
This function is used when transmitting
DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver
of a DTMF transmission is generally a
home telephone answering machine or a
company's automated guidance call center
(When you send tone signals back
according to the voice guidance
recording).
7. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete, returning to main menu.”
Voice input command list for voice
recognition learning
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
When reading out, the following points
must be observed:
l
Read out the numbers one at a time
2. Say: [Beep] “XXXX... send” (Say
correctly and naturally.
(For example, “1234” must be read out
“one, two, three, four”, not “twelve, thirty
four”.)
DTMF code)
3. Prompt: “Sending XXXX... (DTMF
code)”
l
Do not read out parentheses. “ (” and
hyphens “-” are used for separating
numbers in a phone number.
Ex.
“ (888) 555-1212” must be spoken “Eight,
eight, eight, five, five, five, one, two, one,
two.”
Phrase
Command
0123456789
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(888) 555-1212
Call
Dial
Setup
Cancel
Continue
Help
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Safety Certification
When Bluetooth Hands-
Free cannot be used
FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC07 IC:279B-
MBLUEC07
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used
under the following conditions:
l
The mobile telephone is outside of the
communication area.
The mobile telephone has a
l
malfunction.
The mobile telephone is not connected
l
to the hands-free unit equipped on the
vehicle.
The mobile telephone battery is weak.
The mobile telephone is turned off.
The mobile telephone is placed where
l
l
l
WARNING
radio reception is difficult.
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
The term “IC: ” before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter. End-users and installers must
be provided with installation instructions
and transmitter operating conditions for
satisfying RF exposure compliance.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Sunvisors
Interior Lights
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for
use in front.
qOverhead Light
Switch
Position
Overhead Light
qVanity Mirrors
Light off
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
Light is on when any door is open
Light on
qTrunk Light
Switch
Position
Trunk Light
Light off
Light on when the trunk is open
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Cup Holder
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids
while the vehicle is moving is
Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are on the inside of the
doors.
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups or
drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
Bottle holder
maneuvering, occupants could be hit
and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
CAUTION
Do not use the bottle holders for
containers without caps. The
contents may spill when the door is
opened or closed.
CAUTION
To reduce the possibility of injury in
an accident or a sudden stop, keep
cup holders closed when not in use.
To open the cup holder lid, press the
switch rearward and slide the lid open.
Switch
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qSeat Side Box
Storage Compartments
To open, pull the release catch.
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to
lock, counterclockwise to unlock.
Driving with the storage boxes open
is dangerous. To reduce the
possibility of injury in an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the storage
boxes closed when driving.
Unlock
Lock
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in
the storage boxes while parked under
the sun. A lighter could explode or
the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
qBack Trim Storage Boxí
Small items can be stored in the back trim
storage box.
qGlove Box
To open the glove box, pull the latch
toward you.
Insert the key (auxiliary key*) and turn it
clockwise to lock, counterclockwise to
unlock.
* Advanced key equipped vehicle
Unlock
Lock
To use the back trim storage box
1. To use the desired storage box, slide
the seat in front of it all the way
forward.
Refer to Seat Slide on page 2-2.
2. Fold the seatback forward all the way
down.
Refer to Seat Recline on page 2-3.
6-82
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
3. If your vehicle has a lid, pull the latch
to open.
Accessory Socket
The ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON position.
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
When finished, return the seat to its
original position and secure it. After
returning the seat to its original position,
make sure the seat is secured by
attempting to lightly move it forward and
backward.
CAUTION
Do not store excessive weight in the
back trim storage box as it could be
damaged.
qMesh Pocket
Maps or pamphlets can be placed in the
mesh pocket.
CAUTION
To prevent accessory socket damage
or electrical failure, pay attention to
the following:
Ø Do not use accessories that require
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Ø Do not use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
Ø Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use to prevent
foreign objects and liquids from
getting into the accessory socket.
Ø Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.
Mesh pocket
CAUTION
Do not place thick objects in the
mesh pocket as they could damage
the pocket.
NOTE
To prevent discharging of the battery, do not
use the socket for long periods with the engine
off or idling.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.
Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3
Flat Tireí .................................................................................. 7-3
Tool Storage .............................................................................. 7-5
Instant Mobility System (IMS) Emergency Flat Tire Repair
Kití .......................................................................................... 7-7
Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-20
Towing Description ................................................................. 7-25
Tiedown Hooks ....................................................................... 7-26
Recreational Towing ............................................................... 7-28
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-1
In Case of an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all
the turn signals will flash.
NOTE
l
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l
Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
qVehicle with run-flat tires
Flat Tireí
WARNING
Either run-flat tires or conventional tires
are equipped on your Mazda depending
on the specification, therefore the
procedure for repairing a flat tire differs
depending on the type of tire. Before
driving, make sure which type of tire is
equipped on your Mazda. If you cannot
identify your tire type, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Have the tires checked or perform the
appropriate repair as soon as possible
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer:
When the flat tire warning light
illuminates or the tire pressure
warning beep sound is heard, it is
dangerous to drive the vehicle at high
speeds, or perform sudden
maneuvering or braking. Vehicle
drivability could worsen and result in
an accident.
When the flat tire warning light
illuminates or the tire pressure
warning beep sound is heard,
decrease vehicle speed immediately
and avoid sudden maneuvering and
braking.
qHow to identify your tire type
Run-flat tire
A run-flat tire has a “RFT” mark on the
side wall.
If a run-flat tire is punctured, the FLAT
TIRE warning light illuminates in the
instrument cluster, and a beep sound is
heard for about 30 seconds.
Conventional tire
A conventional tire does not have a
“RFT” mark on the side wall.
NOTE
Until the flat tire is changed, the beep sound is
heard for about 30 seconds every time the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Vehicles with run-flat tires can be driven
even with a punctured tire under the
following conditions.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
Maximum vehicle speed with a
punctured run-flat tire: 90 km/h (55
mph)
Maximum driving distance with a
punctured rum-flat tire: 80 km (49
miles)
CAUTION
The maximum driving distance may
be shorter depending on the driving
conditions.
If a run-flat tire is punctured, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest Mazda
Dealer and have the tire changed.
NOTE
l
A spare tire or Instant Mobility System
(IMS) emergency flat tire repair kit is not
equipped on vehicles with run-flat tires as
standard.
l
Replacing a punctured run-flat tire with a
new run-flat tire is recommended.
l
Do not use run-flat tires and conventional
tires on the same vehicle.
qVehicle with conventional tires
If the following occurs while driving, it
could indicate a flat tire.
l
Steering becomes difficult.
The vehicle begins to vibrate
l
excessively.
The vehicle pulls in one direction. If a
l
conventional tire is punctured, refer to
“Tool Storage” (page 7-5) and “Instant
Mobility System (IMS) Emergency
Flat Tire Repair Kit” (page 7-7).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
Tool Storage
Tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
Trunk room
Instant Mobility System (IMS) Emergency Flat Tire Repair Kit
Lug wrench
Tool bag
Jack Lever
Jack
Towing/Tiedown eyelet
Glove box
Power retractable hardtop
emergency tool bag
eyebolt
hexagonal
wrench
rope
Some models.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
To secure the jack
qJack
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with
the jack screw pointing back and turn
the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily
tighten it.
To remove the jack
1. Turn the knob and remove the cover.
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the figure.
Wing bolt
2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
Jack screw
Wing bolt
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to
secure the jack.
NOTE
If the jack is not completely secured, it could
rattle while driving. Make sure the jack screw
is sufficiently tightened.
Jack screw
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
qAbout the IMS Emergency Flat
Instant Mobility System
(IMS) Emergency Flat
Tire Repair Kití
Tire Repair Kit
The IMS emergency flat tire repair kit
includes the following items.
The IMS emergency flat tire repair kit
included with your Mazda is for a
temporary repair of a slightly damaged
flat tire resulting from running over nails
or similar sharp objects on the road
surface.
Tire sealant
Injection hose
Compressor
NOTE
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire.
In the event of a flat tire, use the emergency
flat tire repair kit to repair the tire temporarily.
When doing the repair, refer to the instructions
included in the emergency flat tire repair kit.
After temporarily repairing a tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your vehicle
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the tire
replaced.
Spare valve
core
Valve core
tool
Repaired tire
sticker
Speed restriction
sticker
Case
Instruction
WARNING
Do not allow children to touch the tire
sealant:
Ingestion of tire sealant is dangerous.
In the event tire sealant is
accidentally swallowed, drink large
amounts of water immediately and
seek medical assistance.
Do not allow children to touch the tire
sealant:
Tire sealant that comes into contact
with the eyes and skin is dangerous.
If tire sealant enters the eyes or
contacts the skin, flush immediately
with large amounts of water and
seek medical assistance.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-7
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
4. Unload passengers and luggage, and
remove the emergency flat tire repair
kit.
l
The tire sealant cannot be reused. Purchase
new tire sealant at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l
The emergency flat tire repair kit cannot be
used in the following cases.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
The period of effective use for the tire
sealant has expired. (The period of
effectiveness is indicated on the bottle
label.)
l
The tear or puncture exceeds about
4 mm (0.16 in).
The damage has occurred to an area of
l
the tire other than the tread.
The vehicle has been driven with nearly
l
5. Shake the tire sealant well.
no air remaining in the tire.
l
The tire has come off the wheel rim.
Damage to the wheel rim has occurred.
The tire has two or more punctures.
l
l
qUsing the IMS Emergency Flat
Tire Repair Kit
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Reverse (R) or 1, and
turn off the engine.
CAUTION
If the bottle is shaken after the
injection hose is screwed on, tire
sealant could spray out from the
injection hose. Tire sealant
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
contacting clothing or other objects
may be impossible to remove. Shake
the bottle before screwing on the
injection hose.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
CAUTION
The tire sealant can be used at outside
_
_
temperatures down to 30°C ( 22°F).
In extremely cold temperatures (0°C (32°F) or
below), the tire sealant hardens easily and
injection of the sealant will be difficult. Warm
the sealant inside the vehicle before doing the
injection work.
If there is air remaining in the tire
when the valve core is removed, the
valve core could fly out. Remove the
valve core carefully.
8. Turn the valve core counterclockwise
with the valve core tool and remove the
valve core.
6. Remove the cap from the bottle. Screw
on the injection hose with the bottle's
inner cap left on to break the inner cap.
Valve
Valve core
Injection hose
Bottle
NOTE
Store the valve core in a place where it won't
7. Remove the valve cap from the flat
tire. Press the back of a valve core tool
to the core of the tire valve and bleed
all the remaining air.
get dirty.
9. Remove the plug from the injection
hose and insert the injection hose into
the valve.
Valve
Plug
Valve cap
Injection hose
Valve core tool
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
10. Hold the bottom of the bottle upright,
squeeze the bottle with your hands,
and inject the entire amount of tire
sealant into the tire.
NOTE
Do not throw away the empty tire sealant
bottle after use. Return the empty tire sealant
bottle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer when
replacing the tire. The empty tire sealant bottle
will need to be used to extract and dispose of
the used sealant from the tire.
13. Attach the vehicle speed restriction
sticker in a place where the driver can
easily see it.
Valve
NOTE
The tire sealant cannot be reused. Purchase a
new tire sealant kit at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
11. Pull out the injection hose from the
valve. Reinsert the valve core into the
valve and turn it clockwise to install
it.
WARNING
Do not attach the vehicle speed
restriction sticker to the instrument
panel, as it would obstruct vision of
areas such as warning light indicators
or the speedometer:
12. Attach the sticker that indicates
completion of the tire repair on a flat
outer surface of the repaired tire.
Attaching the vehicle speed
restriction sticker to the steering
wheel pad is dangerous. The sticker
could interfere with air bag inflation
and cause serious injury.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
14. Install the compressor hose to the tire
valve.
WARNING
Never operate the compressor above
300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 3 bar, 43.5 psi):
Operating the compressor above 300
kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 3 bar, 43.5 psi) is
dangerous. When the inflation
pressure rises above 300 kPa (3.1
kgf/cm2, 3 bar, 43.5 psi), heated air
will be exhausted from the back of
the compressor and you could be
burned.
Valve
Compressor hose
CAUTION
If the compressor operates slowly or
becomes hot, it indicates
overheating. Turn the compressor off
immediately and leave it turned off
for 30 minutes or longer.
15. Insert the compressor plug into the
interior accessory socket and turn the
ignition switch to the ACC position
(page 6-83).
NOTE
l
Compressor plug
Check the tire inflation pressure label
(driver's door frame) for the correct tire
inflation pressure.
l
Do not use the compressor for longer than
10 minutes because using the compressor
for long periods could damage it.
Compressor
l
If the tire does not inflate, repair of the tire
may not be possible. If the tire does not
reach the correct inflation pressure within a
10-minute period, it probably has received
more extensive damage. When this happens,
the emergency flat tire repair kit cannot be
used to repair the tire. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the tire has been over-inflated, loosen the
screw cap on the compressor and bleed
some of the air out.
Center console
CAUTION
Ø Before pulling out the compressor
plug from the electrical socket,
make sure the compressor power
switch is off.
Ø The compressor turns on and off
with the push-button switch.
l
17. When the tire has been inflated to the
proper inflation pressure, turn the
16. Turn the compressor switch on and
inflate the tire carefully to the correct
inflation pressure.
compressor switch off and remove the
compressor hose from the tire valve.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
18. Install the tire valve cap.
21. If the tire inflation pressure remains
stable, the tire repair is complete.
Drive the vehicle with care to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
tire replaced.
19. Put the emergency flat tire repair kit
in the trunk and continue driving.
CAUTION
Ø Drive carefully to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and keep the
vehicle speed below 80 km/h (50
mph).
Ø If the vehicle is driven 80 km/h (50
mph) or higher, the vehicle might
begin to vibrate.
CAUTION
Ø A tire that has been temporarily
repaired with the tire sealant
cannot be reused. Mazda
recommends replacing the tire
with a new one.
Ø The wheel can be reused after any
sealant adhering to it is wiped off
and carefully inspected. However,
replace the tire valve with a new
one.
20. After driving the vehicle for 10
minutes or 5 km (3 miles), check the
tire pressure with the tire pressure
gauge equipped with the compressor.
If the tire pressure has fallen below
the correct tire pressure, inflate the
tire to the correct pressure again
following the steps from number 15.
qInspecting the IMS Emergency
Flat Tire Repair Kit
Inspect the emergency tire repair kit at
regular intervals.
CAUTION
l
Check the tire sealant period of
Ø If the tire inflation pressure falls
below 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar,
18.9 psi), repair cannot be done
with the repair kit. Park the
vehicle on a level surface off the
right-of-way and contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø If the tire inflation pressure
continues to remain low after
repeating steps 14 to 21, park the
vehicle on a level surface off the
right-of-way and contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
effective use.
Check the operation of the tire
compressor.
l
NOTE
The tire sealant has a period of effective use.
Check the period of effective use indicated on
the bottle label and do not use it if it has
expired. Have the tire sealant replaced at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer before the period of
effective use has expired.
NOTE
When checking the tire inflation pressure with
the tire pressure gauge on the compressor unit,
make sure the compressor switch is turned off.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
Changing a Tire
WARNING
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traffic.
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire, and never get under a
vehicle that is supported only by a jack:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure
5. Remove the jack, and tool (page 7-5).
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the tire to be changed. When blocking
a wheel, place a tire block both in front
and behind the tire.
someone.
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Allowing someone to remain in a
vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
CAUTION
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
NOTE
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks
of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in
place.
The wheels equipped on your Mazda
are specially designed for installation
of the tire pressure sensors. Do not
use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it
may not be possible to install the tire
pressure sensors.
NOTE
l
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before
using it.
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
l
Be sure to register the tire pressure sensor
ID signal code whenever tires or wheels are
changed (page 5-33).
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Reverse (R) or 1, and
turn off the engine.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
qRemoving a Tire
WARNING
1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but
don't remove any until the tire has been
raised off the ground.
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle in
positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even
kill someone. Use only the front and
rear jacking positions recommended
in this manual.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
2. Place the jack under the jacking
position closest to the tire being
changed.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
3. Insert the jack handle into the jack.
Jacking position
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise and
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is firmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
qLocking Lug Nuts
If your vehicle has optional antitheft
wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will
lock the tires and you must use a special
key to unlock them. This key is attached
to the lug wrench. Register them with the
lock manufacturer by filling out the card
provided in the glove box and mailing it
in the accompanying envelope. If you lose
this key, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer or use the lock manufacturer's
order form, which is with the registration
card.
Antitheft lug nut
Special key
5. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise, then remove the
wheel.
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the key for the antitheft lug nut.
2. Place the key on top of the nut, and be
sure to hold the key square to it. If you
hold the key at an angle, you may
damage both key and nut. Don't use a
power impact wrench.
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
To install the nut
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
1. Place the key on top of the nut, and be
sure to hold the key square to it. If you
hold the key at an angle, you may
damage both key and nut. Don't use a
power impact wrench.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the key,
apply pressure, and turn it clockwise.
qMounting the Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the lug
nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts
could loosen while driving and cause
the tire to come off, resulting in an
accident. In addition, lug nuts and
bolts could be damaged if tightened
more than necessary.
4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order
shown.
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off, resulting in
an accident.
2. Mount the tire.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
If you're unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store
them properly.
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used (page 5-30).
Nut tightening torque
88―118
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
(9―12, 65―87)
WARNING
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off. This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same configuration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the
stud, which could cause the wheel to
slip off and cause an accident.
5. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to
the specification charts on page 10-7.
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Overheating
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating:
Overheating
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating, the vehicle loses power, or
you hear a loud knocking or pinging
noise, the engine is probably too hot.
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in park (P), a manual
transmission in neutral.
WARNING
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
Turn off the ignition switch and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from under the hood or from
the engine compartment.
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Don't go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
If neither coolant nor steam is
escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
Do not remove the cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
it cools.
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
CAUTION
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the
engine temperature will increase.
Stop the engine and call an
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
NOTE
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it's low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
Once the engine coolant exceeds a preset
temperature, an electrical cooling fan turns
on. It will continue running for about 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
off.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Overheating
If you find a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
If you find no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
8-20).
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the
cooling system inspected. The engine
could be seriously damaged unless
repairs are made. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Starting a Flooded Engine
If the engine fails to start, it may be
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).
Follow this procedure:
1. If the engine does not start within five
seconds on the first try, turn the key to
the LOCK position, wait ten seconds
and try again.
2. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position and hold it there―for up to
ten seconds. If the engine starts, release
the key and accelerator immediately
because the engine will suddenly rev
up.
4. If the engine fails to start, crank it
without depressing the accelerator―for
up to ten seconds.
If the engine still does not start using the
above procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Follow These Precautions Carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery
fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that
could cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a
battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative (
terminal of the battery.
)
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may
rupture or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.
The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and
other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in
series or a 24 V motor generator set).
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jumper cables
Discharged battery
Booster battery
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
1. Remove the rubber hose from the
battery cover.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
l
Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
Attach the other end to the positive
l
terminal on the booster battery (2).
Connect one end of the other cable
l
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3).
Connect the other end to the ground
l
point indicated in the illustration
away from the discharged battery
(4).
2. Remove the battery cover from its right
side.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
7. When finished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
the illustration.
8. If the battery cover has been removed,
install it in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V
and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
4. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, don't allow both vehicles to
touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and all
unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
NOTE
Push-Starting
l
Before installing the battery cover, make
sure both of the cables connecting the
negative battery terminal (right side of
battery) are connected with the cables
routed toward the right and back of the
battery as shown in the figure.
Do not push-start your Mazda.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be
injured.
CAUTION
Do not push-start a vehicle that has
a manual transmission. It can
damage the emission control system.
NOTE
l
Verify that the covers are securely installed.
You can't start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission by pushing it.
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Towing Description
CAUTION
Do not tow the vehicle pointed
forward with driving wheels on the
ground. This may cause internal
damage to the transmission.
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Government and local laws must be
followed.
A towed vehicle usually should have its
drive wheels (rear wheels) off the ground.
If excessive damage or other conditions
prevent this, use wheel dollies.
CAUTION
Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. This could damage your
vehicle. Use wheel-lift or flatbed
equipment.
Wheel dollies
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Type B
Tiedown Hooks
Front
CAUTION
Don't use the tiedown hooks under
the front and rear for towing.
They are designed ONLY for tying
down the vehicle when it's being
transported. Using them for towing
will damage the bumper.
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet, lug
wrench, and jack lever from the trunk
(page 7-5).
Rear
2. Wrap the jack lever with a soft cloth to
prevent damage to a painted bumper,
and open the cap located on the front or
rear bumper.
Type A
Front
CAUTION
Ø Do not use excessive force as it
may damage the cap or scratch
the painted bumper surface.
Ø The rear bumper cover cannot be
removed completely. Attempting
to forcefully remove the rear
bumper cover could result in it
being damaged.
NOTE
Remove the front bumper cover completely and
store it so as not to lose it.
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet
using the lug wrench.
Rear
Lug wrench
Front
CAUTION
Ø If the tiedown eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or
Lug wrench
Rear
disengage from the bumper when
tying down the vehicle. Make sure
that the tiedown eyelet is securely
tightened to the bumper.
Ø Front tiedown hook is designed
only for towing, and lashing at
oversea transportation. Do not use
front tiedown hook for other use
(truck/railway transportation etc).
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown
eyelet.
Front
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Recreational Towing
An example of “recreational towing” is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transmission is not designed for
towing this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer to
“Towing Description” (page 7-25) and
“Tiedown Hooks” (page 7-26) and
carefully follow the instructions.
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
8
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 8-3
Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 8-25
Battery ..................................................................................... 8-27
Tires ........................................................................................ 8-30
How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage .................... 8-48
Exterior Care ........................................................................... 8-50
Interior Care ............................................................................ 8-54
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Introduction
Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you're unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as
prescribed.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance.But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
l
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 1
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
6
12
24
15
18
36
24
48
30
30
60
36
72
45
42
84
48
96
60
Maintenance Interval
12
7.5
22.5
37.5
52.5
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,
adjust
Engine valve clearance
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,
every 2 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
Fuel lines and hoses*2
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
C
C
I
R
C
I
I
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
6
12
24
15
18
36
24
48
30
30
60
36
72
45
42
84
48
96
60
Maintenance Interval
12
7.5
22.5
37.5
52.5
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)
Flat tire repair kit (if installed)*3
Inspect annually
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
C: Clean
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 2
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,
adjust
Engine valve clearance
Puerto Rico
Others
Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,
every 2 years
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Puerto Rico
Others
C
C
R
C
I
C
R
Air filter
R
C
Fuel lines and hoses*2
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
I
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
USA
Replace every 96,000 km (60,000 miles)
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)
Spark plugs
Others
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Flat tire repair kit (if installed)*3
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect annually
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
R
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
C: Clean
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
l
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 1
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
I
I
Engine valve clearance
Engine oil
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
60,000 km or 3 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
R
R
R
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
R
R
I*2
I*2
R
R
R
I*2
I*2
R
R
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
Fuel filter
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 60,000 km
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
R
I
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Flat tire repair kit (if installed)*3
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect annually
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
I
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
R
I
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system and heat shields
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
All locks and hinges
I
I
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 2
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine valve clearance
Engine oil
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
60,000 km or 3 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
R
Engine coolant level
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
R
C
R
I*2
I*2
R
C
R
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
Fuel filter
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 60,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
R
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Flat tire repair kit (if installed)*3
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
Inspect annually
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system and heat shields
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
All locks and hinges
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
C: Clean
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
(Cont.)
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
×1000 km
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
I
Engine valve clearance
Engine oil
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
60,000 km or 3 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
R
R
I
Engine coolant level
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
R
I*2
I*2
R
C
R
C
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
Fuel filter
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 60,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
×1000 km
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Flat tire repair kit (if installed)*3
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
Inspect annually
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
R
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Exhaust system and heat shields
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
All locks and hinges
I
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
T
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
C: Clean
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Schedule
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service
technician as soon as possible.
qWhen Refueling
l
Brake and clutch fluid level (page 8-22)
Engine coolant level (page 8-20)
Engine oil level (page 8-19)
Washer fluid level (page 8-23)
l
l
l
qAt Least Monthly
Tire inflation pressures (page 8-30)
qAt Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
l
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical
ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
l
Engine coolant (page 8-20)
Engine oil (page 8-18)
l
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Precautions
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
As explained in the Introduction (page 8-2), several procedures can be done only by a
qualified service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If
you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or
the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualified technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even
more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Turn off the ignition switch and make sure the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do
not forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a
fire leading to an unexpected accident.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Compartment Overview
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir / Clutch
fluid reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir
Fuse block
Air filter
Battery
Cooling system cap
Power steering fluid cap
Engine coolant reservoir
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline
Engines” by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark
symbol conforms to the current engine
and emission system protection standards
and fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese
Engine Oil
NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qRecommended Oil
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
automobile manufacturers.
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine
friction.
–30
–10
10
30
20
40 50
–20
0
–20
80
100
120
0
20 40
60
U.S.A. and CANADA
5W-20
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
(ILSAC)
(ILSAC)
Mexico
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil. If SAE 5W-20
engine oil is not available in your market. Use
SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
CAUTION
Don't add engine oil over Full. This
may cause engine damage.
–10
10
30
–30
20
40 50
–20
0
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is
positioned properly before reinserting
the dipstick.
–20
80
100
120
0
20 40
60
The distance between Low and Full on the
dipstick represents the following:
Oil capacity
5W-20
L (US qt, Imp qt)
0.75 (0.79, 0.66)
qInspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
Full
OK
Low
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.
It's OK between Low and Full.
But if it's near or below Low, add
enough oil to bring the level to Full.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year―at the beginning of the
winter season―and before traveling
where temperatures may drop below
freezing.
Engine Coolant
qInspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Do not use a match or live flame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become
very hot. You could be burned.
Carefully inspect the engine coolant
in the coolant reservoir, but do not
open it.
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the F and L marks
on the coolant reservoir when the engine
is cool.
Turn off the ignition switch and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
If it's at or near L, add enough coolant to
the coolant reservoir to provide freezing
and corrosion protection and to bring the
level to F.
Do not remove the cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
CAUTION
If the “FL22” mark is shown on or near the
cooling system cap, use FL22 type engine
type is used, the engine coolant must be
replaced earlier than the specified replacement
interval indicated in the scheduled
Ø Radiator coolant will damage
paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
Ø Use only soft (demineralized)
water in the coolant mixture.
Water that contains minerals will
cut down on the coolant's
effectiveness.
maintenance (page 8-3).
Ø Don't add only water. Always add
a proper coolant mixture.
Ø The engine has aluminum parts
and must be protected by an
ethylene-glycol-based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or
Silicate.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol
with the coolant. This could
damage the cooling system.
Ø Don't use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze.
This would reduce effectiveness.
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qAdding Brake/Clutch Fluid
Brake/Clutch Fluid
WARNING
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on
yourself or on the engine:
q
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the
same reservoir.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept at MAX.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake and clutch
linings. If it is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch system inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it
gets in your eyes, they could be
seriously injured. If this happens,
immediately flush your eyes with
water and get medical attention.
Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine
could cause a fire.
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low,
have the brakes and clutch inspected:
Low brake/clutch fluid levels are
dangerous. Low levels could signal
brake lining wear or a brake system
leak. Your brakes could fail and
cause an accident.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it
reaches MAX.
Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the
area around the cap.
CAUTION
Ø Brake and clutch fluid will
damage painted surfaces. If brake
or clutch fluid does get on a
painted surface, wash it off with
water immediately.
Ø Using nonspecified brake and
clutch fluids (page 10-4) will
damage the systems. Mixing
different fluids will also damage
them.
If the brake/clutch system
frequently requires new fluid,
consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Power Steering Fluid
Washer Fluid
qInspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
qInspecting Power Steering Fluid
Level
CAUTION
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, don't operate the
vehicle for long periods when the
power steering fluid level is low.
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
NOTE
Use specified power steering fluid (page 10-4).
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at
each engine oil change with the engine off
and cold. Add fluid if necessary; it does
not require periodic changing.
Operating your vehicle in
temperatures below 4 degrees C (40
degrees F) using washer fluid without
anti-freeze protection is dangerous
as it could cause impaired windshield
vision and result in an accident. In
cold weather, always use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the use
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which
are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in
washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
The level must be kept between MIN and
MAX.
Visually examine the lines and hoses for
leaks and damage.
If new fluid is required frequently, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
Use plain water if washer fluid is
unavailable.
But use only washer fluid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade
assembly to expose the plastic locking
clip.
Wiper Blades
CAUTION
Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic
car washers have been known to
affect the wiper's ability to clean
windows.
Compress the clip and slide the
assembly downward; then lift it off the
arm.
Ø To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, don't use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
Plastic locking clip
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, don't
let it slap down on the windshield.
2. Hold the end of the rubber and pull
until the tabs are free of the metal
support.
q
Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
Metal support
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, don't try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
Tab
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
NOTE
CAUTION
Install the blade so that the tabs are toward the
Ø Don't bend or discard the
stiffeners. You need to use them
again.
bottom of the wiper arm.
Ø If the metal stiffeners are
switched, the blade's wiping
efficiency could be reduced.
So don't use the driver's side metal
stiffeners on the passenger's side,
or vice versa.
Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal
stiffeners in the new blade rubber
so that the curve is the same as it
was in the old blade rubber.
8-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting
to ensure safe and correct handling:
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery
fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with
water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when
working near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle
body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
8-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
qBattery Maintenance
l
Remove the rubber hose first, and then
battery cover before performing battery
maintenance.
Battery cover
Rubber hose
To get the best service from a battery:
l
Keep it securely mounted.
Keep the top clean and dry.
Keep terminals and connections clean,
l
l
l
Before installing the battery cover, make
sure both of the cables connecting the
negative battery terminal (right side of
battery) are connected with the cables
routed toward the right and back of the
battery as shown in the figure.
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly
or terminal grease.
Rinse off spilled electrolyte
l
immediately with a solution of water
and baking soda.
If the vehicle will not be used for an
l
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables.
8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí
does not alleviate the need to check the
tire condition every day, including
whether the tires all look inflated properly.
Inspect all tire pressure monthly when the
tires are cold. Maintain recommended
pressures for the best ride, handling, and
minimum tire wear.
Tires
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire inflation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
When checking the tire pressures, use of a
digital tire pressure gauge is
recommended.
WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor
braking; leading to loss of control.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Using any other tire size than what is
specified for your Mazda (page 10-7)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, tire
clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specified for your
Mazda.
Refer to the specification charts (page
10-7).
NOTE
l
qTire Inflation Pressure
Always check tire pressure when tires are
cold.
WARNING
Always inflate the tires to the correct
pressure:
l
Warm tires normally exceed recommended
pressures. Don't release air from warm tires
to adjust the pressure.
Overinflation or underinflation of
or unexpected tire failure could result
in a serious accident.
Refer to specification charts on page
10-7.
l
Underinflation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,
and poor sealing of the tire bead, which
will deform the wheel and cause separation
of tire from rim.
l
Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,
have it inspected.
8-30
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qTire Rotation
CAUTION
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires if
irregular wear develops. According to the
scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to
Scheduled Maintenance on page 8-3.
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to
rear, not from side to side. Tire
performance will be reduced if
rotated from side to side.
NOTE
Because your vehicle is not equipped with a
spare tire, you cannot do a tire rotation safely
with the jack that comes with your vehicle.
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
tire rotation.
CAUTION
Limited-Slip Differential system;
don't use the following:
Ø Tires not of the designated size
Ø Tires of different sizes or types at
the same time
Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated
If these instructions aren't followed,
the rotation of the left and right
wheels will be different and will thus
apply a constant load on the limited-
slip differential.
This will cause a malfunction.
Forward
qReplacing a Tire
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
l
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
l
l
CAUTION
l
Severe braking
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to
specification (page 10-7) and inspect the
lug nuts for tightness.
8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
qReplacing a Wheel
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
l
When tires with steel wire reinforcement in
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size
on your vehicle:
function correctly even with a genuine
wheel.
Refer to System Error Activation on page
5-32.
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors
whenever tires or wheels are replaced.
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-33.
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
l
CAUTION
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator
will appear as a solid band across the
tread.
Ø A wrong-sized wheel may
adversely affect:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Tire fit
Replace the tire when this happens.
Wheel and bearing life
Ground clearance
Snow-chain clearance
Speedometer calibration
Headlight aim
Tread wear indicator
Bumper height
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Ø
Limited-Slip Differential System
Ø (With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
Ø
New tread
Worn tread
When replacing/repairing the
tires or wheels or both, have the
work done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer, or the tire
pressure sensors may be
You should replace it before the band is
across the entire tread.
NOTE
damaged.
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. Regarding the
manufacturing week and year is indicated with
4 digit.
Ø
The wheels equipped on your
Mazda are specially designed
for installation of the tire
pressure sensors. Do not use
non-genuine wheels, otherwise
it may not be possible to install
the tire pressure sensors.
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.
NOTE
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors
whenever tires or wheels are replaced. Refer to
Tires and Wheels on page 5-33.
8-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
When replacing a wheel, make sure the
new one is the same as the original factory
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and flat spots.
8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Light Bulbs
High-mount brake light
License plate lights
Trunk light
Reverse lights
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Rear side-marker lights
Overhead light
Headlights (High beam)
Headlights (Low beam)
Fog lights
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights
Front side-marker lights
Some models.
8-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing a headlight bulbs
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
High-beam bulbs
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement
is necessary.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on
the connector with your finger and
pulling the connector downward.
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands and
always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it
will explode and serious injuries
could be caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when
lit.
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb
from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb
or breaking it some other way.
qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs
NOTE
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used.
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb
promptly and out of the reach of children.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Low-beam bulbs
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on
the connector with your finger and
pulling the connector rear.
(Xenon fusion bulbs)
You cannot replace the low beam bulbs by
yourself. The bulbs must be replaced at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Halogen bulbs)
1. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, and turn off
engine. If you are changing the left
bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.
2. Make sure the headlight switch is off.
3. Turn the center section of the plastic
retainer counterclockwise and remove
the retainers and partially peel back the
mudguard.
5. Pull off the sealing cover.
Removal
Installation
6. Unhook the bulb retaining spring.
8-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
7. Remove the adapter.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on
the connector with your finger and
pulling the connector downward.
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Front fog light bulbsí
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb
from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Turn the screws and the center section
of the plastic retainers
counterclockwise and remove them,
then partially peel back the mudguard.
Removal
Installation
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Front side-marker lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-37
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
2. Turn the screws and the center section
of the plastic retainers
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb
from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
counterclockwise and remove them,
then partially peel back the mudguard.
Removal
Installation
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on
the connector with your finger and
pulling the connector downward.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
NOTE
(Replacing front-passenger side lamp bulb)
Turn the socket and bulb assembly screw
counterclockwise.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights
Rear turn signal lights, Reverse lights,
Brake lights/Taillights, Rear side
marker lights
1. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, and turn off
Rear side marker lights
engine. If you are changing the left
bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.
Due to the complexity and difficulty of
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
2. Make sure the turn signal switch is off.
Rear turn signal lights, Reverse lights,
Brake lights/Taillights
3. Turn the center section of the plastic
retainer counterclockwise and remove
the retainers and partially peel back the
mudguard.
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off
and the applicable light switch is off.
Removal
2. Lift the trunk.
3. Pull the center section of the plastic
retainers and remove them, then
remove the trunk end trim.
Installation
Removal
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Installation
4. Remove the trunk light connector.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Remove the trunk lid release lock-out
button connector.
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
6. On the side the bulb is to be replaced,
pull the center section of the plastic
retainers and remove them, then
remove the trunk side trim.
Removal
Brake lights/Taillights
Installation
7. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
8-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
High-mount brake light
qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs
Due to the complexity and difficulty of
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Overhead light
1. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the trim and
gently insert it in the overhead light as
shown in the figure, and then remove
the cover.
License plate lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
2. Lift the trunk.
3. Slide the light to the left side of the
vehicle and remove it.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Trunk light
Fuses
1. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the trim and
gently insert it in the luggage
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
compartment light as shown in the
figure, and then remove the luggage
compartment light unit.
If any lights, accessories, or controls don't
work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
qFuse Replacement
Replacing the fuses on the vehicle's left
side
If the electrical system does not work,
first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's left
side.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
1. Turn off the ignition switch and other
switches.
2. Remove the cover.
8-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse
puller provided on the inside of the
engine compartment fuse block cover.
Replacing the fuses under the hood
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the fuses in
the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Turn off the ignition switch and all
other switches.
Fuse puller
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
Fuse block cover
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it's
blown.
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating.
Blown
Normal
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it
does not fit tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the MIRROR or CIGAR circuit.
Normal
Blown
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with one of the
same rating. Otherwise you may
damage the electric system.
8-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Do not replace the main fuse by
yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer perform the replacement:
Replacing the fuse by yourself is
dangerous because the MAIN fuse is
a high current fuse. Incorrect
replacement could cause an electrical
shock or a short circuit resulting in a
fire.
8-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qFuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
RATING
1
2
3
4
FAN
FAN
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
―
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
DEFOG
H/CLEAN
Rear window defroster
―
Overhead lights, Luggage compartment light, For protection of
various circuits
5
ROOM
15 A
6
IG KEY2
HEATER
ABS
15 A
40 A
30 A
15 A
―
For protection of various circuits
7
Air conditionerí
8
ABS
Front fog lightsí
9
FOG
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R.FOG
RHT L
RHT R
MAG
ST
―
Power retractable hardtop (LH)í
Power retractable hardtop (RH)í
Air conditionerí
30 A
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
15 A
40 A
Starter
TAIL
Taillights, Parking lights, License plate lights, illuminations
ABS
ABS
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-45
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
For protection of various circuits
RATING
30 A
120 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
40 A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
BTN
MAIN
For protection of all circuits
Injector
EGI INJ
EGI COMP1
EGI COMP2
HEAD LOW L
HEAD LOW R
HEAD
Engine control system
Engine control system
Headlight low beam (LH)
Headlight low beam (RH)
Headlight high beams
Power windows
P.WIND
ENGINE
WIPER
Engine control system
Windshield wipers and washer
DRLí
DRL
HORN
Horn
STOP
Brake lights
ETV
Electric throttle valve
Fuel Pump
FUEL PUMP
HAZARD
P.WIND2
IG KEY1
Turn signals, Hazard warning flashers
Power windowsí
For protection of various circuits
8-46
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse block (Driver's side)
FUSE
RATING
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
Audio system, Power control mirror
1
2
ACC
AUX PWR
METER
SEAT WARM
ILLUMI
A/C
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
―
Accessory Socket
3
Instrument cluster
Seat warmerí
4
5
Illumination
Air conditionerí
6
7
ENGINE
―
Engine control system, For protection of various circuits
8
―
9
M.DEF
AUDIO
D.LOCK
SILEN
―
―
―
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20 A
20 A
―
Audio systemí
Power door lock, Trunk opener
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
íSome models.
8-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
qDamage Caused by Bird
How to Minimize
Environmental Paint Damage
Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap
Occurrence
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
aren't removed they can eat away the clear
and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
When insects stick to the paint surface
and decompose, corrosive compounds
form. These can erode the clear and color
base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if
they are not removed.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent
them.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
qEtching Caused by Acid Rain or
permanently to the paint finish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Industrial Fallout
Occurrence
Prevention
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the finish.
It is necessary to have your Mazda
washed and waxed to preserve its finish
according to the instructions in this
section. This should be done as soon as
possible.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Bird droppings can be removed with a
soft sponge and water. If you are traveling
and these are not available, a moistened
tissue may also take care of the problem.
The cleaned area should be waxed
according to the instructions in this
section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you suspect that acid rain has settled on
your vehicle's finish.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
8-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
NOTE
l
qWater Marks
The paint chipping zone varies with the
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
In low temperatures a vehicle's finish
hardens. This increases the chance of paint
chipping.
Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on
your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the
damage by using Mazda touch-up paint
according to the instructions in this section.
Failure to repair the affected area could
lead to serious rusting and expensive
repairs.
Occurrence
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these
minerals settles on the vehicle and
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate
and harden to form white rings. The rings
can damage your vehicle's finish.
l
l
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you find water marks on your vehicle's
finish.
qPaint Chipping
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of
having your paint chipped by flying
gravel.
8-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
l
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
Rub gently when washing or drying the
vehicle.
Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
Don't use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
Exterior Care
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
l
l
l
qMaintaining the Finish
Washing
To help protect the finish from rust and
deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
CAUTION
Ø Don't use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may damage the protective
coating; also, cleaners and
detergents may discolor or
deteriorate the paint.
Ø To prevent damaging the antenna,
remove it before entering a car
wash facility or passing beneath a
low overhead clearance.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
Scratches occur on the paint surface
when:
l
The vehicle is washed without first
rinsing off dirt and other foreign
matter.
The vehicle is washed with a rough,
l
Pay special attention to removing salt,
dirt, mud, and other foreign material from
the underside of the fenders, and make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are clean.
dry, or dirty cloth.
l
l
The vehicle is washed at a car wash
that uses brushes that are dirty or too
stiff.
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
are used.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can
damage the finish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
NOTE
l
Mazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
l
Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles
with darker paint finishes.
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Don't allow soap
to dry on the finish.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint finish:
l
Rinse off any dirt or other foreign
matter using lukewarm or cold water
before washing.
8-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
qRepairing Damage to the Finish
Deep scratches or chips on the finish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance is normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to all parts,
both repaired and new. This will
prevent them from rusting.
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
qBright-Metal Maintenance
Waxing
l
Use tar remover to remove road tar and
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the finish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
To prevent corrosion on bright-metal
l
surfaces, apply wax or chrome
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
During cold weather or in coastal areas,
l
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
CAUTION
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
Don't use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar
materials will usually also take off the wax.
Rewax these areas even if the rest of the
vehicle doesn't need it.
deterioration.
8-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
qUnderbody Maintenance
qAluminum Wheel Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
NOTE
l
Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on
aluminum wheels. They may damage the
coating.
l
Only use a mild soap or neutral detergent
Thoroughly flush the underbody and
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold
water at the end of each winter. Try also
to do this every month.
and always use a sponge or soft cloth to
clean the wheels.
Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or cold
water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels
after driving on dusty or salted roads. This
helps prevent corrosion.
Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic
car wash that uses high-speed or hard
brushes.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
l
l
If your aluminum wheels lose luster, wax
the wheels.
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped
there will cause rusting.
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Check special requirements for Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-33.
WARNING
qConvertible Top Maintenanceí
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance is normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
The convertible top is made of a special
high-grade material, but if it's not taken
good care of, hardening, staining, and loss
of luster will result. Maintain it under
these guidelines.
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
Washing
Do not wait until the convertible top gets
really dirty before cleaning it. Dirt that's
there too long will cause deterioration.
1. Before washing, remove dust and
coarse particulate with a soft brush.
8-52
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
2. Gently clean the convertible top with a
synthetic neutral detergent, lots of
water, and a soft brush.
Appearance (Polyvinyl only)
Dress the convertible top once a month
after washing and drying it well. For best
results, use a water-based leather
treatment or vinyl top dressing. This will
help maintain good appearance and
material condition of the convertible top.
3. Rinse it thoroughly with clean water to
remove all the soap.
4. Wipe it as dry as you can before the
water dries on it.
CAUTION
5. Then allow it to dry completely before
lowering it.
Ø Some leather treatment products
can ruin the convertible top's
gloss. Be careful of the one you
choose.
Ø Test on an inconspicuous, small
corner of the convertible top if you
are not sure.
CAUTION
Ø Automatic and high-pressure car
washes are harmful to a
convertible top. Avoid them.
Ø Do not spray water directly on the
area where the window glass and
the convertible top meet. This
would probably cause water to
enter the cabin.
Ø Do not spray water with a hose or
a car washing device directly on
the seam area of the body and the
convertible top as it could result in
water penetrating the trunk.
Ø Do not get any car wax on the
convertible top.
If you do, remove it with a good
leather cleaner.
Ø Too much treatment on the
convertible top can be as
damaging as too little. Follow the
manufacturer's directions.
Do not overdo it!
Ø Let the convertible top dry
completely before lowering after
applying treatment or dressing.
qHardtop Maintenanceí
Washing
To help protect the hardtop's finish, use a
soft cloth or sponge to wash it.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can
damage the finish if they are not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-53
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Interior Care
CAUTION
Ø Don't use an automatic car wash.
Ø Don't use strong soap, chemical
detergents, or hot water, and don't
wash the hardtop in direct
sunlight or when the surface is
warm.
qDashboard Precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
and cosmetic oils from contacting the
dashboard. They'll damage and discolor it.
If these solutions get on the dashboard,
wipe them off immediately.
Thoroughly rinse with lukewarm or cold
water. Don't allow soap to dry on the
finish.
CAUTION
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients
which may cause discoloration,
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.
Waxing
Wax the hardtop when water no longer
beads on the paint. Always wash and dry
it before waxing.
qCleaning the Upholstery and
Interior Trim
CAUTION
Ø Wiping off dust or dirt with a dry
cloth will scratch the finish.
Ø Don't use abrasive wax. This may
damage the protective coating and
discolor or deteriorate the paint.
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
cleaner.
Leatherí
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar
materials will usually also take off the wax.
Rewax these areas.
Real leather is not uniform and may have
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it
with a leather cleaner or mild soap.
If the leather gets wet from rain, remove
the moisture as soon as possible and dry
in a shaded area.
If the seats get wet, promptly remove
moisture with a dry cloth and allow it to
further dry in a shaded area.
If moisture is not removed, it will cause
hardening and shrinkage of the leather.
Do not leave vinyl products on the seats
for long periods as they may affect the
leather quality and coloring.
8-54
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Fabric
qCleaning the Window Interiors
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean it with a mild soap solution good
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh
spots immediately with a fabric spot
cleaner.
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them
with glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the container.
CAUTION
Don't scrape or scratch the inside of
the rear window. You may damage
the rear window defroster grid.
To keep the fabric looking clean and
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color
will be affected, it can be stained easily,
and its fire-resistance may be reduced.
CAUTION
Use only recommended cleaners and
procedures. Others may affect
appearance and fire-resistance.
qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Don't bleach
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry
the belt webbing and make sure there is
no remaining moisture before retracting
them.
WARNING
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
replace damaged seat belts
immediately:
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection.
8-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting
Safety Defects
9
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 9-2
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 9-6
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 9-42
Service Publications .......................... 9-44
Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 9-12
Outside the United States and
Country (Except United States and
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ....................................... 9-19
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
Location of the Tire Label
Tire Maintenance .............................. 9-32
Vehicle Loading ................................ 9-35
Steps for Determining the Correct Load
Limit: ................................................ 9-41
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint
system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a
certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management, you can reach Mazda North American Operations by one of the following
ways.
Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the
page at www.mazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
qSTEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may not
be possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered, Mazda
North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the
extent permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to
BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon
Law”. If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to first use BBB AUTO
LINE.
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding
on you or Mazda else you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
qCalifornia Customers
1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/
arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200
Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.
BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration Certification
Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may file a claim with BBB
AUTO LINE. Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after
the expiration of the warranty.
3. To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the
call.
4. In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and
address, the brand name and vehicle identification number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage, the
approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were first brought to the
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal
hearing. The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the
time your complaint is filed; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contact
Mazda about your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an
inspection/report by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by
BBB AUTO LINE.
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I of
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative is
unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs first, one or more of the following
occurs:
l
The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that
substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that
is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the
nonconformity has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents
AND the buyer or lessee has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
l
The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda or its
agents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
l
The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the
vehicle to the buyer.
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618
ATTN: Customer Mediation
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).
10. You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and
any findings will be admissible in a court action.
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we
receive notice of your acceptance of the decision.
12. Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Canada)
qSatisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In
our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your
dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal
dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General
Manager.
qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc.Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address
and phone numbers are shown (page 9-8).
qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800)
263-4680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” page
of section 10 of this manual for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
qMediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer
Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still
not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about
how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through
binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that
goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the
award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of it's dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish
to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:
Province/Territory
British Columbia & Yukon Territories
Alberta & Northwest Territories
Saskatchewan
CAMVAP Number
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba
Ontario
Atlantic Canada
Quebec
qRegional Offices
REGIONAL OFFICES
AREAS COVERED
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
8171 ACKROYD ROAD
SUITE 2000
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
RICHMOND B.C.
V6X 3K1
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
(604) 303-5670
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
ONTARIO
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
(905) 787-7000
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANS
CANADIENNE
QUEBEC,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
(514) 694-6390
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized
Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top
condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Mexico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
l
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
l
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda Motor de Mexico
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda Motor de Mexico
by one of the following ways.
Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
Mexico, can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx
By phone at: 1 (866) 315 0220
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Importer/Distributor
Distributor in Each Area
qU.S.A.
qCANADA
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)
q
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto
Rico)
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00936-2722
TEL: (787) 641-9300
qMEXICO
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Circuito Guillermo Gonzalez Camarena N
1500 Col. Centro de Ciudad Santa Fe.
01210, Mexico, D.F.
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico
qGUAM
Triple J Motors
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,
GUAM 96911 USA
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931
TEL: (671) 649-6555
qSAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234-7524
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051
qAMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American
Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699-9347
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Warranties for Your Mazda
l
l
l
l
l
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Distributor Major Component Limited Warranty (Canada only)
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
Federal Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)
l
Emission Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
l
l
l
l
l
California Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)
Emission Control Warranty (Canada only)
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Tire Warranty
NOTE
Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States and Canada
Government regulations in the United States and Canada require that automobiles meet
specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the
United States, its territories, and Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside these areas.
You may have these problems if you do:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
The Mazda warranty applies only to Mazda vehicles registered and normally operated in
the United States, its territories, and Canada.
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United
States may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside the United States. However, in the event that you are moving to Canada
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety requirements (CMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on
vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United
States:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside Canada
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission
regulations and safety regulations. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada may differ
from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on
vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except
United States and Canada)
Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific
emission and safety standards.
Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition
to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another
country.
The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your
vehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed
parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safety
systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of
injuries in an accident.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as
mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an
improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine
stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Cell Phones
Cell Phones Warning
WARNING
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your State or Province:
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of
these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious
accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe
area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-
free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell
phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead,
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and
temperature performance.
qTread Wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
qTraction-AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction
tests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
qTemperature-A, B, C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
WARNING
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary
with respect to grade.
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND
TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
qUniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
UTQGS MARK (example)
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Labeling
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of
a recall.
qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires
Please refer to the diagram below.
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number
2. Passenger car tire
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
5. Radial
6. Rim diameter code
7. Load index & speed symbol
8. Severe snow conditions
9. Tire ply composition and materials used
10. Max. load rating
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
11. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades
12. Max. permissible inflation pressure
13. SAFETY WARNING
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
NOTE
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
215
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
65
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.
15
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
95
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each
tire can support.
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
99 mph
Q
R
S
106 mph
112 mph
118 mph
124 mph
130 mph
149 mph
168* mph
186* mph
T
U
H
V
W
Y
* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow
AT: All Terrain.
AS: All Season. The “M+S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in
mud and snow.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. In
general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and other.
Maximum Load Rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by
the tire.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under
normal driving conditions.
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Snow Tires
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.
Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other
tires on your vehicle.
SAFETY WARNING
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:
l
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-
MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)
TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT
TIRES.
l
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-
FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qInformation on Temporary Tires
Please refer to the diagram below.
1. Temporary tires
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
4. Diagonal
5. Rim diameter code
6. Load index&speed symbol
T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
115
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
70
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.
16
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
90
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each
tire can support.
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
M
81 mph
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)
You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.
SAMPLE
qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure
On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi
inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is
maintained.
Refer to Tires on page 10-7.
NOTE
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the
information in this owner's manual:
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may
result in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing
and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire
can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking
at them.
qChecking Tire Pressure
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold ―meaning they are not
hot from driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the
valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
6. Replace the valve cap.
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.
NOTE
Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other
irregularities.
NOTE
Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the
pressure.
Under-inflation can cause serious failures and accidents.
Over-inflation can produce a harsh ride and the greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
9-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qGlossary of Terms
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and
the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of
manufacture.
Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and
cargo.
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's
mounted on the vehicle.
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity
is described on the tire label.
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Maintenance
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are
some important maintenance points:
qTire Inflation Pressure
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the
pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.
qTire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular
wear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a
combination of the following:
l
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
l
l
l
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 10-7) and inspect the lug nuts
for tightness.
9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern
or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be
weakened if rotated from side to side.
(With limited-slip differential)
Don't use the following:
Ø Tires not of the designated size
Ø Tires of different sizes or types at the same time
Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated
If these instructions aren't followed, the rotation of the left and right wheels will be
different and will thus apply a constant load on the limited-slip differential.
This will cause a malfunction.
qReplacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could
result in an accident.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace
the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high
loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Regarding the manufacturing week and year is
indicated with 4 digit. Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-23.
9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qSafety Practices
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate
good driving habits for your own benefit.
l
Observe posted speed limits
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Do no run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking
l
l
l
CAUTION
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your
tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution
until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire
is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with
your spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
9-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Vehicle Loading
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle
damage.
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle,
familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings,
from the vehicle's Safety Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:
WARNING
Overloaded Vehicle:
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's
suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure,
handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the
distance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail
completely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a
combination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation
pressure.
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.
9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed to
carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THE
COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER
EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire
label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any
aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of
the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be
accurate.
9-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
CARGO
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment.
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire
label.
9-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg
(849 lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:
_
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg
(699 lbs)
_
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2)
lbs) = 249 kg (549 lbs)
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) -
including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight
cargo
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's door
frame or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
9-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
WARNING
Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and
could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling,
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, or loss of control.
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle
damage.
9-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GCW
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the
vehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
WARNING
Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or
damage to the vehicle.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
9-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit:
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
_
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
9-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor
Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
Importer/Distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153) ; go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC,
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
NOTE
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618-2922
or
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 9-12) in
this booklet.
9-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm
9-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
Service Publications
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do
some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the
chart below.
If they don't have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER
9999-95-042B-09
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)
2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)
2009 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)
2009 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL
9999-MX-042B-09
9999-95-026G-09
9999-MX-026G-09
9999-95-031C-09 (U.S.A. only)
9999-EC-031C-09 (Canada only)
9999-PR-031C-09 (Puerto Rico, Mexico only)
9999-95-072F-09
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL
2009 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS
qWORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and
chassis.
qWIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical
system.
qOWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.
This is not a technician's manual.
qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.
9-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
10
Technical information about your Mazda.
Specifications ............................................................................... 10-4
Specifications .......................................................................... 10-4
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification Numbers
qChassis Number
Vehicle Information Labels
qVehicle Identification Number
The vehicle identification number legally
identifies your vehicle. The number is on
a plate attached to the cowl panel located
on the left corner of the dashboard. This
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield.
qVehicle Emission Control
Information Label
q
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
qTire Pressure Label
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification Numbers
qEngine Number
Forward
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications
qEngine
Item
Type
Specification
DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder
87.5 × 83.1 mm (3.44 × 3.27 in)
1,999 ml (1,999 cc, 122.0 cu in)
10.8
Bore×Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
qElectrical System
Item
Battery
Classification
12V-36AH/5HR
Spark-plug number
Spark-plug gap
L3G2 18 110*1, L3Y1 18 110
1.25―1.35 mm (0.049―0.053 in)
*1 ex factory
CAUTION
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate
coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.
qLubricant Quality
Lubricant
Classification
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers
on page 8-18.
Engine oil
API Service
SAE
GL-4 or GL-5
75W-90
Any temperature
5-speed
transmission
API Service
SAE
GL-4 or GL-5
80W-90
Manual transmission
oil
Above 10°C (50°F)
API Service
SAE
GL-4 or GL-5
75W-90
6-speed transmission
Automatic transmission fluid
JWS3309
API Service
SAE
GL-5
90
Rear differential oil
80W-90
75W-90*1
Power steering fluid
Brake/Clutch fluid
ATF M-III or equivalent (e.g. Dexron® II)
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
*1 Not available from Mazda
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
qCapacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Item
Capacity
Except U.S.A. and Canada
4.55 L (4.81 US qt, 4.00 Imp qt)
6-speed manual
transmission
With oil filter
replacement
4.55 L (4.81 US qt, 4.00 Imp qt)
4.45 L (4.70 US qt, 3.92 Imp qt)
U.S.A. and
Canada
Engine oil
Except 6-speed manual
transmission
Without oil filter replacement
4.05 L (4.28 US qt, 3.56 Imp qt)
7.5 L (7.9 US qt, 6.6 Imp qt)
2.0 L (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt)
2.1 L (2.2 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt)
7.4 L (7.8 US qt, 6.5 Imp qt)
0.7 L (0.7 US qt, 0.6 Imp qt)
Coolant
5-speed transmission
6-speed transmission
Manual transmission oil
Automatic transmission fluid
Rear differential oil
48.0 L
Fuel tank
(12.7 US gal, 10.6 Imp gal)
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.
qDimensions
Item
Vehicle specification
4,032 mm (158.7 in)
4,013 mm (158.0 in)
1,720 mm (67.7 in)
1,245 mm (49.0 in)
1,255 mm (49.4 in)
1,490 mm (58.7 in)
1,495 mm (58.9 in)
2,330 mm (91.7 in)
With license plate holder
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Without license plate holder
Soft top
Hardtop
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
qWeights
(Manual transmission)
Weight
Without power retractable
Item
With power retractable
hardtop
hardtop
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
1,396 kg (3,078 lbs)
714 kg (1,574 lbs)
682 kg (1,504 lbs)
1,416 kg (3,122 lbs)
714 kg (1,574 lbs)
702 kg (1,548 lbs)
Front
Rear
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
(Automatic transmission)
Weight
Without power retractable
Item
With power retractable
hardtop
hardtop
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
1,396 kg (3,078 lbs)
714 kg (1,574 lbs)
693 kg (1,528 lbs)
1,416 kg (3,122 lbs)
714 kg (1,574 lbs)
702 kg (1,548 lbs)
Front
Rear
qAir Conditioner
Item
Classification
Refrigerant Type
HFC134a (R-134a)
qLight Bulbs
Exterior light
Category
Light bulb
Wattage
ECE R (SAE)
― (H9)
High beam
65
55
Headlights
Low beam
Halogen
Xenon fusion
H7 (H7)
35
D2S (D2S)
― (#7444NA)
H11 (H11)
― (―)
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights
Fog lightsí
28/8
55
Front side-marker lights
High-mount brake light
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Reverse lights
5
LED*1
― (―)
21
WY21W (―)
W21/5W (#7443)
W16W (#921)
W5W (4CP)
― (―)
21/5
18
License plate lights
5
Rear side-marker lights
LED*1
*1 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
Interior light
Light bulb
Overhead light
Wattage
10
8
Trunk light
10-6
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
qTires
NOTE
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.
your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure. Refer to Tire Inflation
Pressure on page 8-30.
Standard tire
Inflation pressure
Tire size
Front
Rear
205/50R16 87V
205/45R17 84W
200 kPa (29 psi)
200 kPa (29 psi)
200 kPa (29 psi)
200 kPa (29 psi)
qFuses
Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-42.
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Emergency starting .................... 7-20
Advanced Key ..................................... 3-2
Advanced key maintenance ......... 3-5
Advanced key suspend
Beep Sounds
Ignition key reminder ................. 5-53
Lights-on reminder ..................... 5-53
Tire inflation pressure warning
Auxiliary key .............................. 3-18
Locking, unlocking with request
switch ........................................... 3-8
Opening the trunk lid with request
Operation range ............................ 3-7
beep ............................................ 5-54
Before Starting the Engine .................. 4-5
After getting in ............................. 4-5
Basic Bluetooth Hands-Free
Operation ................................... 6-64
Mazda Bluetooth Hands-Free
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 5-8
Appearance Care ............................... 8-48
Audio System ................................... 6-15
Operating tips for audio
Customer Service ....................... 6-79
be used ....................................... 6-78
Bottle Holder ..................................... 6-81
Brake/Clutch
Automatic Transmission
Driving tips ................................ 5-19
Manual shift mode ..................... 5-15
Shift-lock system ....................... 5-15
Transmission ranges ................... 5-14
Average Fuel Economy Display ........ 5-36
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..... 5-8
Foot brake .................................... 5-5
Pad wear indicator ...................... 5-10
Parking brake ............................... 5-6
Warning light ............................... 5-7
Break-In Period ................................... 4-6
Bulb Replacement ............................. 8-34
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
C
Carbon Monoxide ............................... 4-4
Catalytic Converter ............................. 4-3
Child Restraint
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ..... 5-25
DSC OFF indicator light ............ 5-26
DSC OFF switch ........................ 5-27
TCS/DSC Indicator light ............ 5-26
systems ....................................... 2-25
Climate Control System ...................... 6-2
Gas specifications ...................... 10-6
Convertible Top
Cruise Control ................................... 5-21
Cup Holder ........................................ 6-81
Customer Assistance ........................... 9-2
Push-starting .............................. 7-24
Emergency Towing ........................... 7-25
Emission Control System .................... 4-3
Engine
Hood release .............................. 3-42
Oil .............................................. 8-18
Overheating ................................ 7-18
Starting ......................................... 5-4
Engine Coolant
D
Dashboard Illumination .................... 5-39
Daytime Running Lights ................... 5-56
Defroster
Driving In Flooded Area ................... 4-10
Driving on Uneven Road .................. 4-12
Driving Tips ........................................ 4-6
Automatic transmission .............. 5-19
Driving in flooded area .............. 4-10
Driving on uneven road ............. 4-12
Hazardous driving ........................ 4-7
Money-saving suggestions ........... 4-6
Rocking the vehicle ...................... 4-8
Winter driving .............................. 4-9
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge ................................................ 5-38
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 4-4
Exterior Care ..................................... 8-50
Flasher
Hazard warning .......................... 5-60
Headlights .................................. 5-55
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
F
Instant Mobility System
(IMS) Emergency Flat Tire Repair
Tool storage .................................. 7-5
Fluids
Classification .............................. 10-4
Owner maintenance ................... 8-15
Fuel
Filler lid and cap ........................ 3-40
Fuses ................................................. 8-42
Panel description ........................ 8-45
Replacement ............................... 8-42
Immobilizer System
DSC OFF .................................... 5-52
Headlight high-beam .................. 5-51
Instrument Cluster ............................. 5-35
Interior Care ...................................... 8-54
Interior Lights ................................... 6-80
J
G
Jump-Starting .................................... 7-21
Glove Box ......................................... 6-82
H
Keyless Entry System ....................... 3-24
Keys .................................................. 3-23
Headlights
Control ....................................... 5-55
Flashing ...................................... 5-56
HomeLink Wireless Control
Specifications ............................. 10-6
Lighting Control ............................... 5-55
Lubricant Quality .............................. 10-4
System .............................................. 5-61
Hood Release .................................... 3-42
Horn .................................................. 5-60
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
M
Maintenance
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country ............................................. 9-18
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 4-8
Owner maintenance
Manual Transmission Operation ....... 5-10
Mesh Pocket ..................................... 6-83
Mirrors
Seat Belt System
Outside mirrors .......................... 3-73
Rearview mirror ......................... 3-74
Money-Saving Suggestions ................ 4-6
Automatic locking ........................ 2-9
Pregnant women .......................... 2-8
Pretensioner and load limiting.... 2-12
Seat belt precautions .................... 2-6
Warning light/beep ..................... 2-15
Security System
O
Outside Temperature Display ............ 5-36
Overhead Lights ................................ 6-80
Overheating....................................... 7-18
Overloading ...................................... 4-11
P
Immobilizer system
Parking in an Emergency .................... 7-2
Power Door Locks ............................ 3-31
Power Steering .................................. 5-20
Fluid ........................................... 8-23
Power Windows ................................ 3-37
Push-Starting ..................................... 7-24
Speedometer ...................................... 5-36
Starting the Engine.............................. 5-4
Steering Wheel .................................. 3-73
Horn ........................................... 5-60
R
Rear Window Defroster .................... 5-59
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
S
Back trim storage box ................ 6-82
Mesh pocket ............................... 6-83
Seat side box .............................. 6-82
Sunvisors .......................................... 6-80
Inside trunk release lever ............ 3-35
Trunk Light ....................................... 6-80
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 5-57
T
Tiedown
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 5-28
Tire pressure monitoring system
Automatic transmission .............. 5-46
Brake system .............................. 5-42
KEY warning light
warning light .............................. 5-30
Tires and wheels ......................... 5-33
Tires
Inflation pressure ........................ 8-30
Snow tires .................................... 4-9
(UTQGS) ................................... 9-21
Tool ..................................................... 7-5
Tool Storage ........................................ 7-5
Towing
(Red)/KEY indicator light
Low fuel ..................................... 5-45
Seat belt ...................................... 5-45
Seat belt pretensioner system ..... 5-44
Tire pressure monitoring
Weights ............................................. 10-5
Wheel Replacement .......................... 8-32
Windblocker ...................................... 6-84
Hook .......................................... 7-26
Recreational towing ................... 7-28
Trailer towing ............................. 4-13
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
W
Windows
Windshield Wipers ............................ 5-58
Blades replacement .................... 8-25
Winter Driving .................................... 4-9
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
La Crosse Technology Thermometer IR 101 User Manual
Lanier Printer Accessories LD160C User Manual
Lenmar Enterprises Camping Equipment SOLV17 User Manual
Lenovo Blu ray Player 10086 User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welding System IM843 C User Manual
Luxeon Indoor Furnishings E2528 48 S4N User Manual
Magellan GPS Receiver 3030 LM User Manual
Makita Cordless Drill 6073D and 6073DW User Manual
Memorex Answering Machine MPH2089 User Manual
Micro Star Computer Computer Hardware G52 73601X1 User Manual